Contents

Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide PDF

1 of 252
1 of 252

Summary of Content for Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide PDF

2 0 1 7 U S E R G U I D E

2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

Whether its providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicles heritage, knowing what steps to

take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know youll find the app an important extension of your ALFA

ROMEO vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store

or Google Play and enter the search keyword Alfa Romeo (U.S. market only).

17GA-926-AA ALFA ROMEO GIULIA

Fourth Edition User Guide

If you have any questions about your vehicle or need assistance, please call Alfa Romeo Customer Care at 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada).

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owners Manual or Warranty Booklet by calling 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.

The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted

can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC

strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature

that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cell phones,

computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle

is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also

dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable

to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cell phones or texting while driving.

It is always the drivers responsibility to comply with all local laws.

I M P O R T A N T

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your

Owners Manual, Radio Manual and Warranty Booklets can be found by visiting the website on

the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase

replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase

replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.

D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O L Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

W A R N I N G ! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owners Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owners Manual and Radio Manual found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit alfaromeousa.com or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this User Guide to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here you will find information, advice, and important warnings regarding vehicle use, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Please take your time in reading this guide, and familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. You are advised to read through the User Guide before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become comfortable with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. Additionally, this User Guide provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find the description of the Services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. After reading through the User Guide, you are advised to keep the User Guide inside the vehicle as an easy reference, and to make sure it remains on board should the vehicle be sold. We are sure that these will help you to appreciate and get in touch with your new vehicle, as well as the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo.

Note: This User Guide describes all vehicle models. Optional contents or equipment meant for specific Markets or particular versions are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the version you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (if equipped). All data contained in this User Guide is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact the Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

READ THIS CAREFULLY

Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Starting The Engine Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.

Parking On Flammable Material The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting The Environment The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical Accessories If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

Scheduled Servicing Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page.

Symbols Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.

READ THE OWNER HANDBOOK

DO NOT TOUCH WITH HANDS

IT CAN START AUTOMATICALLY ALSO

WITH ENGINE OFF

PROTECT YOUR EYES DO NOT OPEN THE CAP WHEN THE ENGINE IS

HOT

DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PRESSURE GAS

KEEP CHILDREN AT A DISTANCE BURSTING

MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS OF YOUR BODY AND CLOTHES AWAY

DO NOT APPROACH FLAMES CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE

4

VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Note:

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, which could cause accidents resulting in fatal injury.

The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle, in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health.

If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the car and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur.

5

6

This page is intentionally left blank

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In this section, you will find important information to help you become familiar with the features needed to operate your vehicle, and how they function.

KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . .12 ENGINE IMMOBILIZER . . . . . . . . .13 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . .23 STEERING WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . .25 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . .28 WINDSHIELD WIPERS . . . . . . . . .31 CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . .33 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . .34 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS . . . . . . .40

9

KEYS Key Fob

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system includes a key fob and a keyless push button ignition. The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from distances. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

PANIC Function The key fob contains a PANIC button. Should you ever feel threatened, push this button and the vehicle security alarm will sound. To activate the PANIC function, push and hold the PANIC button for at least one second. When the panic alarm is

active, the headlights turn on, the turn signals flash, the horn honks intermittently, and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The panic alarm will remain active for three minutes, and can be deactivated:

By pushing the PANIC button again.

Automatically if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). In both cases, the panic alarm is immediately deactivated.

Warning!

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Operation

Door And Trunk Lid Unlock Briefly pushing the unlock button on the key fob will unlock the doors and trunk lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from the Information and Entertainment System). Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver side front door or twice within one second to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. The current unlock setting can be changed through the Information and Entertainment System menu, so that the system unlocks:

All doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.

Unlock the driver door on the first push of the key fob unlock button. Flashing of the turn signals upon locking/unlocking the doors and activation of the courtesy light upon unlocking the doors can be activated or deactivated through the Information and Entertainment System. For further

Key Fob

10

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

information, refer to the Information and Entertainment System Owners Manual Supplement. The doors can also be unlocked by using the emergency key, located inside the key fob. Door And Trunk Lid Lock Briefly pushing the lock button on the key fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn off the interior lights, and flash the turn signals (if activated in the Information and Entertainment System). If one or more doors are open, these doors will also lock, and this is indicated by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The doors prepare for locking, which becomes active from the moment they are closed. The doors will unlock again only if the key fob is detected inside the passenger compartment. The doors can be locked by using the emergency key in the drivers side door lock.

Trunk Lid Opening Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened. Remote Start The remote start button on the key fob enables engine starting (push the button twice to start the engine). Car Finder Push the lock or unlock button to remotely and temporarily turn on the turn signals and headlights. This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in a crowded area like a parking garage, for example. Pushing the lock or unlock button again will restart the lights turn on timer (if the parking lights functions were already active, it will remain active). This function is available only if the doors are closed.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

11

IGNITION SYSTEM Operation

To activate the keyless ignition, the key fob must be inside the passenger compartment.

The keyless ignition has the following modes:

STOP: engine off, steering locked. Some electrical devices (e.g. central door locking system, alarm, etc.) are still available.

ON: all electrical devices are available. This state can be entered by pushing the ignition button once, without pressing the brake pedal.

AVV: engine starting. This state can be entered by pushing the ignition button once while pressing the brake pedal.

Note:

With the keyless ignition in the ON position: if 30 minutes pass with the gear selector in P (Park) and the engine stopped, the keyless ignition will automatically reset to the STOP position.

With the engine started, it is possible to remove the key fob from the vehicle. The engine will remain running and the instrument cluster will indicate the absence of the key fob when the door is closed.

For more information on the engine start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And Operating."

Warning!

Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the AVV or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system.

Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button

12

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Caution!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery

If the key fob battery is discharged, proceed as follows to start the vehicle:

1. Lift the front armrest.

2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline found on the floor of the armrest compartment while pushing the START/STOP button to start the ignition.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER Engine Immobilizer Operation

The Engine Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized use of the vehicle by disabling engine starting. The system does not need to be enabled or activated. Operation of the immobilizer is automatic whether the vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine Immobilizer system identifies the code transmitted by the key. If the code is recognized as valid, the Engine Immobilizer system enables engine starting. When the ignition is brought back to STOP, the Engine Immobilizer system deactivates the control unit controlling the engine, disabling engine starting. For the correct engine starting procedures, refer to Starting The Engine in Staring And Operating.

Key Fob Placement Location

13

Irregular Operation If the key code is not recognized during starting, the Engine Immobilizer Failure / Break-in Attempt icon is displayed on the instrument panel (refer to "Warning Lights And Messages" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel"). This condition leads to the engine turning off after two seconds. In this case, switch the ignition to STOP and then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it is still not possible to start the engine, contact an authorized dealer. If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is displayed while driving, this means that the system is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop). If the display persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED To Arm The Alarm

With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed and the keyless ignition system placed in the STOP position, push and release the lock button on the key fob. The alarm can also be armed by pushing the Passive Entry door handle button, located on the exterior door handle. For further information, refer to "Passive Entry" in "Doors.

When the alarm is armed, the warning lights on the panels of the interior front door handles will flash.

The activation of the alarm is preceded by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the system emits a further acoustic signal. If a second acoustic signal is emitted after the alarm is already armed, wait about four seconds and disarm the alarm by pushing the unlock button. Verify that the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed correctly and then rearm the system by pushing the lock button on the key fob. If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in system operation. In this case, contact an authorized dealer.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

Lock/Unlock Buttons

14

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

To Disarm The Alarm

Push the unlock button to disarm the alarm. While disarming, the following operations are performed:

Two brief flashes of the turn signals (if programmed)

Two brief acoustic signals (if programmed)

Doors are unlocked The alarm can also be disarmed using the Passive Entry System, by grasping one of the Passive Entry front door handles with a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For further information refer to "Passive Entry" in "Doors.

Note:

The alarm does not disarm when the doors are unlocked by inserting the blade of the emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder.

To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive Entry

To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. during a long period of vehicle inactivity), insert the blade of the emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder and turn the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to lock the door(s).

DOORS Locking And Unlocking Doors From The Inside

If all doors are closed properly, they will automatically lock once the vehicle has exceeded approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) (Auto Relock function active). Push the interior lock button on the driver or passenger side door panel trim to lock the doors. With doors locked, push the unlock button on the interior trim panel to unlock the doors.

Note: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, lap top or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fobs wireless signal.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

15

Warning!

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Caution!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside

When locking the doors from the outside with the doors closed, push the lock button on the key fob. The door lock can be activated with all doors locked and the trunk lid open. When the lock button on the key fob is pushed, all locks are activated, including the open trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when it is closed. When unlocking the doors from the outside, push the unlock button on the key fob.

Locking/Unlocking Doors From The Outside In An Emergency If the battery is discharged or the key fob is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the doors from the outside by inserting the blade of the emergency key, found inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder and turn the emergency key as follows.

Lock Turn the emergency key to the right (clockwise)

Unlock Turn the emergency key to the left (counter clockwise)

Passive Entry If Equipped

The Passive Entry system can identify the presence of a key fob near the doors and trunk lid. The system enables the doors and trunk lid to be locked or unlocked without pushing any button on the key fob. The key fob is detected only after the system recognizes the presence of a hand on one of the front door handles. If the detected key fob is valid, the doors and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to the Information and Entertainment System Supplement for Passive Entry Settings)

Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel

16

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Note: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fobs wireless signal and prevent the keyless-go system from starting the vehicle. Grasping the handle of the driver's door unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors depending on the mode set using the Information and Entertainment System (refer to the Information and Entertainment System Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). Door Locking To lock the doors, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure that you have the key fob and are close to the driver or passenger side door handle.

2. Push the Passive Entry door handle button or the Passive Entry trunk lid button, located next to the exterior trunk lid release button. This will lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door locking will activate the alarm as well.

Note:

After pushing the Passive Entry door handle button, you must wait two seconds before the doors can be unlocked again using the passive entry door handle button. This feature makes it possible to check whether the vehicle has been locked correctly by pulling the door handle within two seconds. The doors will not be unlocked again. The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob or on the interior door panel. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening If the key fob does not work, e.g. because its battery is discharged or the vehicle battery is discharged, the emergency key inside the key fob can be used to unlock the driver side door. To remove the emergency key, proceed as follows:

1. Push the sides of the key fob inward and extract the cover pulling downwards.

2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob housing.

Passive Entry Door Handle Button

Passive Entry Trunk Lid Button

17

3. Insert the emergency key in the driver side door lock cylinder and turn it to the left (counter clockwise) to unlock the door.

Do not push the door lock/unlock button and pull the handle at the same time.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Power Lock If Equipped

The Power Lock is a safety device that prevents the operation of the interior door handles and the door locking and unlocking buttons. The Power Lock also prevent opening of the doors from inside the passenger compartment. It is recommended to lock the vehicle doors each time the vehicle is parked. Activating The Power Lock The Power Lock is enabled on all the doors by quickly pushing the lock button on the key fob twice. The turn signals will flash to let you know that the Power Lock is active. If one or more of the doors are not closed correctly, the Power Lock will not activate, preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passenger compartment by entering the vehicle, and then closing, the open door.

Key Fob Cover Removal

Removing Emergency Key

Do Not Grab The Door Handle When Locking

18

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Deactivating The Power Lock The Power Lock disengages automatically:

When the doors are unlocked, pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

When the keyless ignition is placed in the ON position.

Child Safety Locks

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system. This device can be engaged only with the doors open.

Lock position: device locked (door opened from exterior only)

Unlock position: device unlocked (door may be opened from the inside) The Child Safety Locks remain locked even if the doors are unlocked.

Note: The rear doors cannot be opened from the inside when the Child Safety Lock is engaged.

Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged Battery

Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if the vehicle battery is discharged. Rear Doors And Passenger Door

1. With the doors unlocked insert the emergency key from the key fob or a flat bladed screwdriver into the door lock manual release lock cylinder.

2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder clockwise for the right door locks or counterclockwise for the left door locks.

3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the manual release lock. Proceed as follows to realign the door lock device (only when the battery charge has been restored):

Push the lock button on the electronic key

Push the unlock button on the door panel

Unlock drivers door lock with the emergency key

Operate the internal door handle

Note: For the rear doors, if the Child Safety Locks are engaged, and the previously described locking procedure is carried out, operating the internal handle will not open the door. Instead, it will only realign the lock release device. To open the door, the outside handle must be used. The door central locking/ unlocking buttons are not deactivated when the emergency lock is engaged.

Child Safety Lock Positions

Door Lock Manual Release Lock Cylinder

19

SEATS The front seats can be adjusted to ensure maximum comfort for the occupants. When adjusting the drivers seat, keep the shoulders resting firmly against the backrest, and the wrists within reach of the top of the steering wheel. The driver must also be able to fully press the brake pedal.

Warning!

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Sparco Racing Seats If Equipped

Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjustment lever is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. Using body

pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Height Adjustment Push the height adjustment button upwards or downwards to obtain your desired height.

Seatback Recline To adjust the seatback, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Power Seats On models equipped with power seats, the switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.

Caution!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path.

Manual Seat Adjustment

1 Adjustment Lever 2 Height Adjustment Button 3 Recline Lever

Power Seat Adjustment

1 Seat Switch (Forward/Rearward/ Height) 2 Seatback Switch 3 Lumbar Adjustment

20

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Forward/Rearward Adjustment Push the seat switch forward or rearward to adjust to your desired position.

Seatback Recline The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Power Lumbar Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.

Height Adjustment The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) If Equipped The seat angle can be adjusted in four directions. Lift or push the front part of

the seat switch to move the front part of the seat in the corresponding direction. Release seat switch when the seat has reached the desired position.

Power Bolster Adjustment If Equipped Push the power adjustable bolster buttons to regulate the width of the backrest through the lateral padding.

Driver Memory Seat The driver memory seat buttons allow to store and recall three different drivers seat positions as well as outside power mirror positions. Storing and recalling is possible with the ignition in the ON position, for three minutes after having opened the driver's side door or until

the door is closed, even with the ignition in the STOP position. To set a memory profile, first adjust your seat (and power mirror position if desired) with the various controls, then push the button where you want to memorize the position for 1.5 seconds. To recall a memorized position, push the relevant button briefly.

Warning!

Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.

Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

Heated Seats If Equipped With the engine in the ON position, push the heated seat buttons on the instrument panel.

Seatback Width Adjustment

4 Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons 5 Driver Memory Seat Buttons

21

You can select three heating levels with quick pushes of the heated seat button:

Minimum one orange indicator illuminated on the buttons

Average two orange indicators illuminated on the buttons

Maximum three orange indicators illuminated on the buttons When the heated seat function is not active, pushing and holding the desired heated seat button for 12 seconds will activate the fast maximum heating function. The heater produces a boosted heat level for the first few minutes of operation. After this, the heat automatically lowers to reach the normal temperature level for the maximum setting. After selecting one heating level, heat will be felt within a few minutes.

Note: To preserve the battery charge, this function cannot be activated when the engine is off.

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time

Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Rear Seats

The rear seats allow for three passengers

Note:Middle Seat: The Quadrifoglio version is designed as a 4+1 seat vehicle. The middle seat is of limited use. It is recommended that this seat only be used by a person who can use the backrest as a substitute for the head restraint.

Split Folding Rear Seat If Equipped The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area.

Partial Extension Of The Luggage Compartment (1/3 Or 2/3) Extending the right side of the trunk allows you to carry two passengers on the left part of the rear seat, while extending the left side allows you to carry one passenger Proceed as follows:

Completely lower the rear seat head restraints.

Place the seatbelt so that it doesn't impede the movement of the backrest while tilting it.

Heated Seat Buttons Rear Seat

22

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Operate lever 1 to tilt the left part or lever 2 to tilt the right part of the backrest: it will automatically tilt forward. If necessary, assist the backrest during the initial stage of tilting.

Repositioning The Backrests Move the seatbelts to the side, making sure that they are correctly extended and not twisted, and that they are not trapped behind the backrests of the seats. Then, lift the backrests pushing them back until you hear the locking click on both attachment mechanisms.

Center Backrest Section Tilting Before tilting the backrest, make sure that the rear center seatbelt is not fastened and that there aren't any objects in the middle part of the cushion (if there are any, remove them). Using the release strap, release the central part of the backrest from its housing and tilt it using the head restraint.

Central Backrest Section Repositioning Using the head restraint, lift the central portion upwards, accompanying it during its movement, lightly press to make sure that it is properly attached. Make sure that the armrest is properly attached by trying to move it, if it is not attached, repeat the operation.

HEAD RESTRAINTS Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.

Seat Release Levers

1 Left Side Seat Release Lever 2 Right Side Seat Release Lever

Center Backrest Section Tilting

23

Racing Seat Head Restraints

Your vehicle may be equipped with non-adjustable head restraints on the driver's and passenger's seatbacks. The non-adjustable head restraints consist of a trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatbacks and are intended to help protect you and the passenger from neck injury. Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, on-road positions so that the head restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of your head.

Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) If Equipped

The front head restraints may be height-adjustable. To adjust them, operate as follows:

Upward adjustment: Raise the head restraint until it clicks into place.

Downward adjustment: Push button and lower the head restraint.

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

Note: To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if the head restraints are not used, lower the head restraints to the fully down position.

Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments)

Warning!

All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicles seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

The height of the outboard head restraints can be adjusted. The head restraint of the center seat, if equipped, cannot be adjusted, only removed. For upward adjustment, pull up on the head restraint until it clicks into place. For downward adjustment, push in the adjustment button and lower the head restraint while holding the button to the desired height.

Rear Head Restraint

1 Adjustment Button 2 Release Button

24

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Note: To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if the head restraints are not in use, lower the head restraints to the fully down position.

Head Restraints (Removal)

To remove the head restraints, proceed as follows:

1. Raise the head restraints to their maximum height.

2. Push the adjustment button and the release button at the side of the two supports.

3. Remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.

To reinstall the head restraints, proceed as follows:

1. Hold down both the adjustment button and release button while placing the head restraint post into the holes.

2. Then, reposition the head restraint to the appropriate height for the passengers.

Warning!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

STEERING WHEEL Adjustments

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

25

Warning!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

To Adjust The Position:

1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position.

3. Lock the desired position by pushing the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to the closed position.

Warning!

It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that could adversely affect performance. Doing so could void the New Vehicle Limited Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY, and also result in the vehicle not meeting type-approval requirements.

Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped While the engine is running, push the heated steering wheel button on the instrument panel.

When the function is enabled, the indicator on the button will illuminate.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

1 Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle A Open B Closed

Heated Steering Wheel Button

26

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Warning!

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS Electrochromic Mirror

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. The electrochromic mirror has a power button to activate/deactivate the automatic dimming/anti-glaring function.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the automatic dimming feature is deactivated.

Outside Power Mirrors

Power Adjustment The power mirrors can be adjusted with the ignition ON. Select the desired mirror using the power mirror control.

To adjust the selected mirror, push the knob in the direction desired.

Note: Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the neutral position to prevent accidental movements.

Power Folding With the power mirror control knob in the neutral position, move it to the power folding position. Move the knob again to return the mirrors to the driving position. If the power mirror control knob is moved again during door mirror folding

Electrochromic Mirror Power Button

Power Mirror Control

1 Power Mirror Control Knob A Left B Right C Power Folding Position D Neutral

27

(from closed to open position and vice versa), the movement direction is reversed. Automatic Activation Activating the central door locking system from outside the vehicle automatically folds the mirrors. The mirrors return to the driving position when the ignition is cycled to the ON position. If the door mirrors were folded using the power mirror control knob, they can only be returned to the driving position by rotating the knob again.

Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped Like the electrochromic mirror, an automatic dimming feature is also available on the outside rear view mirrors to prevent glare. The automatic dimming button is the same for all rear view mirrors.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and rear fog lights. In addition, there are buttons for parking sensors deactivation and stop/start. Refer to Starting And Operating for further information.

The exterior lights can be activated only when the ignition is in the ON position, except for the parking lights. Refer to "Parking Lights" in this section for more information. The instrument panel and the various controls on the dashboard will be illuminated when the exterior lights are turned on.

Automatic Headlights

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels.

Function Activation From the O (OFF) position, turn the light switch to the (AUTO) position.

Note: The function can only operate with the ignition position cycled to ON.

Function Deactivation To deactivate the function, turn the light switch to a position other than the

(AUTO) position.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) With the ignition in the ON mode and the light switch turned to the

position, if the dusk sensor detects sufficient external light, the Daytime

Headlight Switch

1 Parking Sensors Deactivation But- ton 2 Parking Light, Daylight Running Lights, Headlight Switch 3 Instrument Panel Dimmer 4 Rear Fog Light Button 5 Stop/Start Button

28

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Running Lights will turn on automatically while the other lights remain off. If the turn signals are operated, the brightness of the corresponding Daytime Running Lights will be decreased as long as the turn signals are on. If equipped, the DRL can be activated/deactivated from the Information and Entertainment System, by selecting the following functions in sequence on the main MENU:

1. Settings.

2. Lights.

3. Daytime Running Lights.

Note:The Daytime Running Lights cannot be deactivated in Canadian markets.

Rear Fog Light

The rear fog light switch is integrated with the headlight switch. Push the button to turn the rear fog lights on/off. The rear fog lights turn on only when the headlights or parking lights are turned on. The lights can be turned off by pushing the button again or by turning the headlight switch to the O (off) position.

When the engine is stopped with the rear fog lights on, they will remain off the next time the engine is started.

Parking Lights

With the ignition in the STOP position, turn the headlight switch to the

position to turn the parking lights on. All of the parking lights will turn on for eight minutes, and opening the door activates an audible warning. To leave only the lights on one side (right/left) illuminated, you must move the multifunction lever (located on the left side of the steering wheel) to the side that you want to remain on. With the parking lights on, the warning light on the instrument panel will come on.

Note: Placing the ignition to ON turns off the parking lights, which were only illuminated on one side.

Headlight Off Delay

The Headlight Off Delay function delays the switching off of the headlights after the vehicle has been stopped. The function can be activated from the Information and Entertainment System by selecting the following functions in sequence on the main menu:

1. Settings.

2. Lights.

3. Headlight Off Delay. The side lights and the headlights stay on for a time that can be set between 30, 60, and 90 seconds.

Function Activation With the headlights on, place the ignition to the STOP position and the timer will then start.

Note: To activate this function, the headlights must be deactivated within two minutes after the ignition has been cycled to the STOP position.

Function Deactivation This function is deactivated by turning on the headlights, the side lights, or by cycling the ignition to ON.

High Beam Headlights To activate the fixed high beam headlights, push the multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, towards the instrument panel. The headlight switch must be turned to the (AUTO) or setting. With high beam headlights on, the

High Beam Indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate.

29

The high beam headlights are turned off by pulling the stalk to its original position. The High Beam Indicator

will turn off in the instrument panel when the headlights are turned off.

Flashing The Headlights Pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel will activate the high beam headlights manually. The lights will remain on as long as the lever is held. Once the lever is released, the lights will resume the previous position.

Automatic High Beam Headlights If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlights system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle

specific light, and automatically switches the headlights from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. This function is enabled with the Information and Entertainment System, and can only be activated with the light switch turned to the (AUTO) position. The first time that the high beam headlights are activated, the Automatic High Beam Headlights system will activate as well, and the warning light

or the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. If the high beam headlights are on, the blue icon/warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel.

Turn Signals To activate the turn signals function, move the multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, up or down until it reaches the detent. Moving the lever upward flashes the right turn signal and moving the lever downward will flash the left turn signal. The or turn signal will blink on the instrument panel. The turn signals turn off automatically when the vehicle is brought back onto a straight course.

Lane Change Function Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically turn off. To turn off the flashing before the end of the cycle, move the lever in the opposite direction until the first click (about half way).

Static Bending Light Function (SBL) If Equipped The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) in order to better illuminate the street and increase the light angle while turning. This function is enabled by rotating the light switch to position or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs activate when the speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). This function can be activated/ deactivated on the Information and Entertainment System by selecting the following functions in sequence on the main menu:

1. Settings.

2. Lights.

3. Cornering Lights.

Multifunction Lever

30

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS Windshield Wiper/ Washers

Operation: The switch on the wiper stalk can be set to the following positions:

Windshield Wiper Off. Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. Low Continuous Wiper Speed. High Continuous Wiper Speed.

Windshield Wiper Operation Rotating the switch to the position activates the first (low) level continuous speed of the windshield wipers in manual mode. Rotating the switch to the position activates the second (high) level continuous speed of the windshield wipers in manual mode.

Rain Sensors Rotating the switch to the position, activates the first, less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Rotating the switch to the position, activates the second, more sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer to Rain Sensor in this section for more information on how this system functions.

Windshield Washer Operation Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel to operate the windshield washer. Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the windshield washer jet and the windshield wiper with a single movement. The wipers and washers will continue to operate until you let go of the stalk. The windshield wiper stops working three strokes after the stalk is released, followed by a final stroke six seconds later to complete the cycle.

Mist Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle. This function is useful to remove small deposits of dust from the windshield or morning dew.

Windshield Wiper Switch

31

Note: This function does not activate the windshield washer. To spray windshield washer fluid onto the windshield, the washing function must be used.

Warning!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Rain Sensor The Rain Sensor feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.

Activation/Deactivation Rotating the wiper switch to position

or activates the rain sensor. The activation of the rain sensor system is done by tapping the wiper stalk upwards while the switch is in the or

position.

To deactivate the system, use wiper switch or cycle the ignition to STOP. If the ignition is cycled to the STOP position, and the wiper switch is left in the or position, no wiping cycle will occur even if it rains when the vehicle is next started (ignition at ON).

32

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

CLIMATE CONTROL Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System

Controls

Automatic Climate Control System

1. Driver Temperature Adjustment Knob 6. Rear Defrost Button 11. Passenger Heated Seat Button If Equipped

2. Driver Side AUTO Button (Automatic Operation)

7. Passenger Side Air Distribution Selec- tion Button

12. Air Conditioning On/Off Button

3. Driver Side Air Distribution Selection Button

8. Passenger Side AUTO Button (Auto- matic Operation)

13. Steering Wheel Heater Button If Equipped

4. Front Defrost Button (Rapid Defrosting) 9. Passenger Temperature Adjustment Knob

14. Driver Side Heated Seat Button If Equipped

5. Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10. SYNC Button Sets Temperature Align- ment Between Driver & Passenger Side

15. Air Recirculation Button

33

For further information on climate control functions, refer to Climate Controls in Getting To Know Your Vehicle in your Owners Manual on www.alfaromeousa.com/owners/ owners-service-manual.

Caution!

The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of this system.

Air Distribution Selection

Push the Air Distribution Selection button on the faceplate to change the mode of air distribution.

Air flow to the windshield and demister window vents to demist/defrost them. Air flow at the central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest and the face. Air flow to the front and rear floor vents. This setting heats the passenger compartment the quickest.

Air flow distributed between the floor vents (hotter air) and the central and side dashboard vents (cooler air). This air distribution setting is useful on sunny days during spring and autumn. Air flow distributed between the floor vents, windshield, and front side window defrosting/demisting vents. This distribution setting warms the passenger compartment while preventing the windows from fogging up. Air flow distribution between the windshield demisting/defrosting vents, and side/central dashboard vents. This distribution setting sends air to the windshield in sunny conditions. Air flow distribution to all vents on the vehicle.

In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls automatically manage the air distribution. When set manually, the respective symbols on the Information and Entertainment System indicate the air distribution setting.

POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches

The power window switches work with the ignition in the ON position and for three minutes after the ignition has been placed in the STOP position. When one of the front doors is opened, this operation is disabled. Driver Side Front Door Controls The switches are located on the door panel trim. All windows can be controlled from the driver side door panel.

Power Window Switches

1 Front Left Window Switch

4 Window Lockout Switch

2 Front Right Window Switch

5 Rear Left Window Switch

3 Rear Right Window Switch

34

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Window Opening Briefly push the window switch once to move the window downward. Push the switch a second time to activate the automatic operation. Pushing the switch a third time will stop the window in the desired position. Window Closing Pull the window switch up to move the window upward. Hold the switch for at least half of a second and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window during Auto-Up operation, push or pull the window switch again. Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door Controls There are single window controls on the passenger and rear door trim panels which operate the door windows. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection The vehicle may be equipped with an anti-pinch safety device for closing the windows. If the safety system senses any obstacle while the window is closing, it will stop the windows movement and reverse it, depending on its position. This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children inside the vehicle.

The anti-pinch safety function is activated both during the manual and the automatic operation of the window. When the anti-pinch system is activated, the window closing is immediately interrupted. Then the window closing is automatically reversed and the window lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in relation to the first stop position. The window cannot be operated during this time.

Note:

In the event of an error, or if the anti-pinch protection is activated three consecutive times, the automatic closing operation of the window will be deactivated. In order to restore the correct operation of the system, the window must be lowered. Power Window System Initialization If power supply is interrupted, the electric window automatic operation must be initialized once more. The initialization procedure described below must be carried out for each door (with the doors closed):

1. Fully close the window to be initialized, with manual operation.

2. After the window has been closed, hold the up switch for at least three seconds.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

35

POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED Power Sunroof

The power sunroof consists of two glass panels (the front one is power and the rear one fixed) and is fitted with a power sunshade in the front, as well as a manually operated sunshade in the rear. Operation of the sunroof is only possible with the ignition at ON. Refer to Ignition in this chapter for further information.

Warning!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the ON mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.

Opening

To open the sunroofs front panel, push the open/close button toward the rear of the vehicle to open completely. The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the open/close button again.

Caution!

Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it.

Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons

1 Open/Close Button 2 Vent Open/Close 3 Power Shade Open/Close

36

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

Closing

From the complete open position, push the open/close button toward the front of the vehicle. The roof will close completely. The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the open/close button again.

Vent Opening

To bring the roof into vent position, push and release the vent button. This type of vent opening can be activated regardless of the position of the sunroof. When starting with the roof in closed position, pushing the button automatically causes its vent-opening. If the roof is already open, the button must be held until the roof reaches the vent-opening position. Pushing vent button again during automatic movement of the roof will stop it.

Sun Shade Movement

The front sunshade is power operated. Push the Power Shade open/close button toward the rear of the vehicle to open the front sun shade. Push the Power Shade open/close button toward the front of the vehicle to close the sun shade.

The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the Power Shade on/off button again. To open the rear sunshade, pull sunshade manually toward the rear of the vehicle.

Pinch Protect Feature

The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety system capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle during the closing movement. If an obstacle is detected, the system intervenes and the movement of the sunroof is immediately reversed into opening.

Initialization Procedure

Automatic operation of the sunroof must be initialized again in case of faulty sunroof operation. It may also be necessary to initialize the sunroof after the vehicles battery as been disconnected and then reconnected. Proceed as follows:

1. Push the open/close button to bring the roof into the completely closed position.

2. Cycle the ignition to the STOP position and wait at least ten seconds.

3. Cycle the ignition to the AVV position. Refer to Ignition in this chapter for further information.

4. Hold the open/close button down for at least ten seconds. You should then hear the mechanical stop of the roof motor.

5. Within five seconds, hold the open/close button down. The roof will perform a complete automatic opening and closing cycle (to indicate that the initialization procedure has been successful). If this does not occur, the procedure must be restarted from the beginning.

37

HOOD Opening

To open the hood, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the release lever located on the drivers side kick panel.

2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and position yourself in front of the grille.

3. Lift the hood slightly.

4. Move the under-hood latch from right to left to release the hood.

5. Raise the hood completely. The operation is assisted by the addition of two gas props which hold it in the open position. Note:

Do not tamper with the props and assist the hood while lifting it.

Use both hands to lift the hood. Before lifting, check that the windshield wiper arms are not raised from the windshield or in operation, that the vehicle is stationary and that the electric park brake is engaged.

Closing

To close, lower the hood to approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from the engine compartment then let it drop. Make sure that the hood is completely closed and fully latched. Do this by trying to open it. If it is not

perfectly closed, do not try to push the hood lid down, but open it and repeat the procedure.

Note:

Quadrifoglio Models: This hood is extremely light, when lowered to approximately 16 inches (40cm), apply a slight pressure and drop the hood.

Always check that the hood is closed correctly to prevent it from opening while the vehicle is travelling. Since the hood is equipped with a double locking system, one for each side, you must check that it is closed on both its side ends.

Warning!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

Hood Release Lever

Lift Under Hood Latch Up Then Left

38

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

TRUNK The trunk unlocking is electrically operated and is deactivated when the vehicle is in motion.

Opening

Opening From The Outside When unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened from outside the vehicle using the exterior trunk lid release button located between the plate lights. Push the button until you hear a click. The trunk lid can also be opened by quickly pushing the exterior trunk lid release button on the key fob twice.

The turn signal indicators will blink and the interior lights will turn on when the trunk lid is opened. They turn off automatically when the trunk lid is closed. The lights turn off automatically after a few minutes if the trunk lid is left open.

Opening From The Inside When unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened from inside the vehicle using the interior trunk lid release button, located under the dashboard near the engine hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid release button until you hear a click.

Trunk Lid Emergency Opening A lever can be found in the trunk lid over the lock to allow opening from the inside.

Pull the lever in the direction indicated by the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever can be seen in the dark.

Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button Interior Trunk Lid Release Button

Emergency Release Button

39

Closing

Grip one of the handles and lower the trunk lid until it clicks.

Note:

It will not be possible to open the trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid opening strap on the trunk lid lock before disconnecting the battery. Refer to Storing The Vehicle in Servicing And Maintenance for the procedure.

Trunk Initialization Note:

If the battery is disconnected or the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid opening/closing mechanism must be re-initialized as follows:

1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid.

2. Push the lock button on the remote control.

3. Push the unlock button on the remote control.

ACTIVE AERODYNAMICS Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa Active Aero) This is an automatic device, working at the vehicle speed, which allows higher reactivity at average speeds and higher vehicle stability at high speeds, regulating the air flow into the lower part of the vehicle.

Note:

The system is not active in temperatures near or below zero, or when the Alfa DNA / Pro selector is in the "Natural" or "Advanced Efficiency" positions.

If there is a fault, a generic failure icon will light up on the instrument panel display, along with a message that will identify the type of malfunction. See your authorized dealer if a fault occurs.

Trunk Lid Interior Handles

Front Fascia

40

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

V E

H IC

LE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This section gives you all the information you need to understand and use the instrument panel correctly.

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . .42 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .44 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . .45 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. .65

41

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Clusters

Instrument Cluster

42

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

1. Tachometer

2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light

3. Instrument Cluster Display

4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Side Of The Vehicle With The Fuel Door)

5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)

Quadrifoglio Instrument Cluster

43

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description

This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds.

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display

During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure indications.

Instrument Cluster Display

44

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

1. Headlight Warning Lights

2. Gearbox Information

3. Front, Side Anti-Collision Systems, Cruise Control

4. Speed Limit Warning Light

5. Compass

6. Reconfigurable Main Area

7. Vehicle Range

8. Failure Warning Lights

9. Odometer

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL The following pages consist of warning lights and messages.

Note:

The warning light turns on together with a dedicated message and/or chime when applicable. These indications are precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owners Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure indication.

The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious faults. Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle. Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. You can stop the warning cycle in both cases by pushing the button located on the windshield wiper stalk. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the failure is eliminated.

45

Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ON This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked as soon as possible. Release the electric park brake, then check that the warning light has turned off. If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer.

ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and

(amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly.

Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to have the system inspected immediately.

46

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the drivers seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to Occupant Restraints in Safety for further information.

Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle.

OIL TEMPERATURE WARNING LIGHT This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high.

Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

Warning!

The fault of the warning light is signaled by the switching on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

If the warning light does not switch on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.

47

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake indicator light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) at a speed no higher then 50 mph (80 km/h). Contact an authorized dealer to have the tire repaired.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

48

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

Tire Pressure Low The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

In any situation in which the message on the display is "See Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to Auxiliary Driving Systems in Safety, strictly complying with the indications that you find there.

49

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT IF EQUIPPED When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to Active Safety Systems in Safety. When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.

REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.

50

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as the engine is started. The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you are driving.

Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling at moderate speed but without demanding excessive effort from the engine or high speed. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the indicator light on constantly may cause damage. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) IF EQUIPPED This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal collision alarm function is not enabled.

Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left in the tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning!

If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.

51

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Indicator light What It Means What To Do

PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position.

LEFT TURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base Instrument Cluster Display) This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

52

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Blue Telltale Indicator Light

Warning Light What It Means What To Do

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS (On Base Instrument Cluster Display) This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, flash to pass scenario.

Red Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE The symbol switches on constantly when the system detects that the engine oil pressure is insufficient.

Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The symbol does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine; the oil level can be checked on the instrument cluster display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System. On the Quadrifoglio version, the oil level can also be checked manually.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

53

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH The symbol lights up when the engine has overheated.

In normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top up with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the symbol comes on when the engine is started again. If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above.

POWER STEERING FAILURE If the symbol remains on, the steering wheel will become more difficult to turn, but steering will still be possible.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

DOOR OPEN The symbol switches on when one or more doors are not completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the car moving.

Close the doors properly.

HOOD NOT PROPERLY SHUT The symbol turns on when the hood is not properly closed. Along with the symbol, an image of the vehicle with an open hood appears on the instrument cluster display. A buzzer is heard when the hood is open and the vehicle is moving.

Close the hood properly.

54

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Symbol What It Means What To Do

TRUNK LID NOT PROPERLY SHUT The symbol turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed. Along with the symbol, an image of the vehicle with an open trunk lid appears on the instrument cluster display. A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.

Close the trunk lid properly.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE The symbol switches on and a buzzer sounds to indicate a failure in the automatic transmission.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS This warning light, along with the related message, signals a failure in the electronic throttle control system (ETC).

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

If a failure is detected, the warning light switches on while the engine is running.

Place the ignition in the off position and the shift selector in the P (Park) position; the warning light should switch off. If the warning light stays on with engine running, the vehicle can still be driven. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

55

Symbol What It Means What To Do

If the warning light flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of performance, irregular/high idling speed or engine stopping might take place and the vehicle may need to be towed.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVEL The symbol switches on, along with the related message on the instrument cluster display, to indicate low engine oil level. On the Quadrifoglio version, the level must also be checked using the dipstick in the engine compartment (see chapter "Servicing And Maintenance").

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The switching on of the symbol signals a failure in the automatic steering correction system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

ALTERNATOR FAILURE The switching on of the symbol with engine on corresponds to an alternator failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

56

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Amber Symbols

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

Engine Immobilizer System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system.

Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system.

Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.

FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred and the system has shut the fuel off.

For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to Enhanced Accident Response System in Occupant Restraint Systems" in "Safety for further information. If it is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is not available.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD The telltale will illuminate when the outside temperature falls to or below 37F (3C).

57

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time.

Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Caution!

Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil pressure sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

58

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Symbol What It Means What To Do

START/STOP SYSTEM FAILURE This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the automatic windshield wiper.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the automatic low beam alignment.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Monitoring system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate lights.

The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical connection. Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an authorized dealer.

KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

59

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Lane Departure Warning system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the automatic high beam headlights.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this case an engine performance limitation is carried out.

Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or idling.

AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio system.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed Limiter system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly closed.

Tighten the cap properly.

60

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Symbol What It Means What To Do

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle because the park brake could remain activated even if automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in In Case Of Emergency.

If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and remember, when executing any maneuvers/ commands, that the electric park brake is not operational.

Warning!

If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

LOW COOLANT LEVEL IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle coolant level is low.

Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.

SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not operating and needs service.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

WEAR ON BRAKE PADS This light will illuminate when the brake pads have reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Note: Always use genuine parts or similar because the Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies.

61

Symbol What It Means What To Do

WEAR ON CCB BRAKE DISCS IF EQUIPPED This light will illuminate when the carbon ceramic brake discs have reached their wear limit.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning! It is recommended to use only original or equivalent, bench-tested spare pads in order to ensure the original performance of the braking system.

Symbol What It Means What To Do

DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic drive control system.

WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Signals a windshield wiper failure. Contact an authorized dealer.

GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE This telltale will illuminate to report a four wheel drive system failure.

Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.

AFS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic directional light system failure.

Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.

62

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

Symbol What It Means What To Do

SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) IF EQUIPPED While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure in the suspension system.

Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked.

WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low.

To refill the liquid, refer to Engine Compartment in Servicing And Maintenance. Always use liquid with the features indicated in the Fluids And Lubricants section in Technical Specifications.

Green Symbols

Symbol What It Means

HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.

START/STOP OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Start/Stop system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off (for the engine restarting modes refer to Stop/Start in Starting And Operating).

SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.

63

Blue Symbols

Symbol What it means

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.

64

G E

TT IN

G TO

K N

O W

Y O

U R

IN S

TR U

M E

N T

PA N

E L

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Operation The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) carries out a continuous diagnosis of the components of the vehicle related to emissions. It also alerts the driver of when these components are no longer in peak condition by switching on the

warning light on the instrument panel (see Warning Lights And Messages paragraph in this chapter). The aim of the OBD system (Onboard Diagnostic) is to:

Monitor the efficiency of the system Indicate an increase in emissions Indicate the need to replace

damaged components The vehicle also has a connector, which can interface with appropriate tools, that makes it possible to read the error codes stored in the electronic control units together with a series of specific parameters for engine operation and diagnosis. This check can be carried out by your authorized dealer.

Note: After eliminating a fault, to check the system completely, your authorized dealer is obliged to run tests and, if necessary certain road tests.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

Warning!

ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle.

If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

For further information, refer to Cybersecurity in Multimedia.

65

66

This page is intentionally left blank

SAFETY

This very important section describes the safety systems that your vehicle may be equipped with, and provides instructions on how to use them correctly.

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS . . . . . .68 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . . .71 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

67

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The vehicle may be equipped with the following active safety devices:

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Drive Train Control (DTC) System Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System Traction Control System (TCS) Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System Hill Start Assist (HSA) System Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)

System For the operation of the systems, see the following pages.

Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System An integral part of the braking system, the ABS prevents one or more wheels from locking and slipping in all road surface conditions, regardless of the intensity of the braking action. The system ensures that the vehicle can be controlled even during emergency braking, allowing the driver to optimize stopping distances.

The system intervenes during braking when the wheels are about to lock, typically in emergency braking or low-grip conditions where locking may be more frequent. The system also improves control and stability of the vehicle when braking on a surface where the grip of the left and right wheels varies, such as in a corner. The Electronic Braking Force Distribution (EBD) system works with the ABS, allowing the brake force to be distributed between the front and rear wheels.

System Intervention The ABS equipped on this vehicle is provided with the "Brake-by-wire" (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. With this system, the command given by pressing the brake pedal is not transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt on the pedal with the traditional system is no longer noticeable.

Warning!

The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.

68

S A

FE TY

Drive Train Control (DTC) System If Equipped Some models of this vehicle are equipped with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD), which offers an optimal drive for countless driving conditions and road surfaces. The system reduces the slipping of the tires to a minimum, automatically redistributing the torque to the front and rear wheels as needed. To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when the road and environmental conditions are such that they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. When the road and environmental conditions require better traction, the vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode. The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is shown on the instrument cluster display.

Note: If the system failure symbol switches on, after starting the engine or while driving, it means that the AWD system is not working properly. If the warning message activates frequently, it is recommended to carry out the maintenance operations.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System The ESC system improves the directional control and stability of the vehicle in various driving conditions. The ESC system corrects the vehicles understeer and oversteer, distributing the brake force on the appropriate wheels. The torque supplied by the engine can also be reduced in order to maintain control of the vehicle. The ESC system uses sensors installed on the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to follow and compares it with the vehicles effective path. When the real path deviates from the desired path, the ESC system intervenes to counter the vehicles understeer or oversteer.

Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is turning more than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel.

Understeer occurs when the vehicle is turning less than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel.

System Intervention The intervention of the system is indicated by the flashing of the ESC warning light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle stability and grip are critical.

Warning!

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.

Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

69

Traction Control System (TCS) The system automatically operates in the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on one or both drive wheels on roads that are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending on the slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated:

If the slipping involves both drive wheels, the system intervenes, reducing the power transmitted by the engine.

If the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, the Brake Limited Differential (BLD) function is activated, automatically braking the wheel which is slipping (the behavior of a self-locking differential is simulated). This will increase the engine torque transferred to the wheel which isn't slipping.

System Intervention The intervention of the system is indicated by the flashing of the ESC warning light on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle stability and grip are critical.

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System The PBA system is designed to improve the vehicles braking capacity during emergency braking.

The system detects emergency braking by monitoring the speed and force with which the brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the braking distance: the PBA system therefore complements the ABS. Maximum assistance from the PBA system is obtained by pressing the brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake pedal should be pressed continuously during braking, avoiding intermittent presses, to get the most out of the system. Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal until braking is no longer necessary. The PBA system is deactivated when the brake pedal is released.

Warning!

The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a PBA-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System This is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitates starting on slopes, activating automatically in the following cases:

Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than REVERSE (R) engaged.

Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and reverse gear engaged. When setting off, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking pressure on the wheels until the engine torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any case for a maximum of two seconds, allowing your right foot to be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator. The system will automatically deactivate after two seconds without starting, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, it is possible to hear a typical mechanical brake release noise, indicating the imminent movement of the vehicle.

70

S A

FE TY

Warning!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system with the electric power steering to increase the safety level of the whole vehicle. In critical situations (braking on surfaces with different grip conditions), the ESC system controls the steering through the DST function to implement an additional torque contribution on the steering wheel in order to suggest the most correct maneuver to the driver.

The coordinated action of the brakes and steering increases the sensation of safety and control of the vehicle.

Note:

The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle.

Active Torque Vectoring (ATV) System Quadrifoglio Only The dynamic drive control is used to optimize and balance the drive torque between the wheels of the same axles. The ATV system improves the grip in turns, sending more drive torque to the external wheel. Given that, in a turn, the external wheels of the car travel more than the internal ones and therefore turn faster, sending a higher thrust to the external rear wheel allows for the car to be more stable and to not suffer an "understeer" condition. Understeer occurs when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The following auxiliary driving systems are available in this vehicle:

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar sensors, located in the rear bumper (one for each side), to detect the presence of other vehicles in the rear side blind spots of your vehicle.

The system warns the driver about the presence of other vehicles in the

Rear Sensor Location

71

detection area by illuminating the warning light located within the door mirror on the side in which the other vehicle was detected.

When the engine is started the warning light turns on to signal the driver that the system is active.

Sensors The sensors are activated when any forward gear is engaged at a speed higher than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged. The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the vehicle is stationary and in PARK (P).

The detection area of the system covers approximately a lane on both sides of the vehicle which is around 9 ft (3 m). This area begins from the door mirror and extends for approximately 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear part of the vehicle. When the sensors are active, the system monitors the detection areas on both sides of the vehicle and warns the driver about the possible presence of vehicles in these areas. While driving, the system monitors the detection area from three different input points (side, rear and front) to check whether an alert needs to be sent to the driver. The system can detect the presence of a vehicle in one of these three areas.

Note:

The system does not alert the driver for the presence of fixed object (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of these objects. This is normal and does not indicate a system malfunction.

The system does not alert the driver about the presence of vehicles coming from the opposite direction, in the adjacent lanes.

Warning!

The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicles mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Note:

For the system to operate correctly, the rear bumper area where the radar sensors are located must stay free from snow, ice and dirt gathered from the road surface.

Do not cover the rear bumper area where the radar sensors are located with any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.).

BSM Indicator Light

72

S A

FE TY

If you wish to install the tow hook after purchasing the vehicle, you need to deactivate the system via the Information and Entertainment System. To access the function, select the following items in sequence on the main menu:

Settings.

Safety.

Blind Spot Alert.

Rear View The system detects vehicles coming from the rear part of your vehicle on both sides and entering the rear detection area with a difference in speed of less than 31 mph (50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle.

Overtaking Vehicles If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, with a difference in speed of less than approximately 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door mirror of the corresponding side illuminates. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light does not illuminate.

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) System This system helps the driver during reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced visibility. The RCP system monitors the rear detection areas on both sides of the vehicle to detect objects moving towards the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum speed between approximately 1 mph (1 km/h) and 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in areas such as parking lots. The system activation is signaled to the driver by an acoustic warning.

Note: If the sensors are covered by objects or vehicles, the system will not warn the driver.

Warning!

Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Operating Mode The system may be activated/ deactivated via the Information and Entertainment System. To access the function, select the following items on the main menu in sequence:

1. Settings.

2. Safety.

3. Blind Spot Alert.

"Blind Spot Alert, "Visual" Mode When the system is enabled, the warning light within the door mirror on the side of the detected object illuminates. The visual warning on the mirror will blink if the driver activates the turn signals, thus indicating the intention to change lane. The warning will be fixed if the driver stays in the same lane.

"Blind Spot Alert" Function Deactivation When the system is deactivated ("Blind Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP systems will not emit neither an acoustic nor visual warnings. The BSM system will store the operating mode running when the engine was stopped. Each time the

73

engine is started, the operating mode stored previously will be recalled and used.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System

This is a driving assistance system which comprises a radar located behind the front bumper and a camera located in the central part of the windshield.

In the event of an imminent collision, the system intervenes by automatically braking the vehicle to prevent the crash or reduce its effects. The system provides the driver with audible and visual signals through specific messages on the instrument cluster display.

The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if a possible frontal accident is detected (limited braking). Signals and limited braking are intended to allow the driver to react promptly, in order to prevent or reduce the effects of a potential accident. In situations with the risk of collision, if the system detects no intervention by the driver, it provides automatic braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential frontal collision (automatic braking). If intervention by the driver on the brake pedal is detected, but not deemed sufficient, the system may intervene in order to improve the reaction of the braking system, therefore reducing vehicle speed further (additional assistance in braking stage). The system will intervene automatically in case of imminent collision or impact against a pedestrian crossing the road (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)).

Note: For safety reasons, when the vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers may remain blocked for about two seconds. Make sure you press the brake pedal if the vehicle moves slightly forward.

Front Bumper Radar Location

Windshield Camera Location

74

S A

FE TY

Warning!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

Engagement/Disengagement The following functions can be selected in sequence using the Information and Entertainment System: Settings, Safety, Forward Collision Warning and "Mode". Select from among three operating modes:

Warning And Brake: the system (if active), in addition to the visual and audible warnings, provides limited braking, automatic braking and additional assistance in braking stage, where the driver does not brake sufficiently in the event of a potential frontal impact.

Only Warning: the system (if active), does not provide limited braking, but guarantees automatic braking or additional assistance in braking stage, where the driver does not brake at all or

not sufficiently in the event of a potential frontal impact.

Disable: the system does not provide visual and audible warnings, limited braking, automatic braking or additional assistance in braking stage. The system will therefore provide no indication of a possible accident. Activation/Deactivation The Forward Collision Warning system is activated whenever the engine is started regardless of what is shown on the Information and Entertainment System. Following a deactivation, the system will not warn the driver about the possible collision with the preceding vehicle, regardless of the setting selected with the Information and Entertainment System.

Note: Each time the engine is started, the system is activated regardless of what setting was selected when it was previously switched off. This function is not active at a speed lower than 4 mph (7 km/h) or higher than 124 mph (200 km/h). The system is active when:

The engine is started.

Is active (on) in the Information and Entertainment System.

The ignition is in the ON position.

The vehicle speed is between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

The front seat belts are fastened.

The Alfa DNA / Pro Selector is not in RACE position (where present). Changing The System Sensitivity The sensitivity of the system can be changed through the Information and Entertainment System menu, choosing from one of the following three options: "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the description in the Information and Entertainment System Supplement for how to change the settings. The pre-set option is "Med". With this setting, the system warns the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a standard distance, between that of the other two settings. With the system sensitivity set to "Far", the system will warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a greater distance, thus providing the possibility of acting on the brakes more lightly and gradually. This setting provides the

75

drivers with the maximum possible reaction time to prevent a potential accident. With the option set to "Near", the system will alert the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is close. This setting offers the driver a lower reaction time compared to the "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a potential collision, but permits more dynamic driving of the vehicle. The system sensitivity setting is kept in the memory when the engine is switched off. System Limited Operation Signal If the dedicated message is displayed, a condition limiting the system operation may have occurred. The possible reasons of this limitation are something blocking the camera view or a fault. If an obstruction is signaled, clean the area of the windshield indicated in. Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may be not completely available. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

System Failure Signaling If the system switches off and a dedicated message is shown on the display, it means that there is a fault on the system. In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle, but you are advised to contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Radar Indication Not Available If conditions are such that the radar cannot detect obstacles correctly, the system is deactivated and a dedicated message appears on the display. This generally occurs in the event of poor visibility, such as when it is snowing or raining heavily. The system can also be temporarily dimmed due to obstructions such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In such cases, a dedicated message will be shown on the display and the system will be deactivated. This message can sometimes appear in conditions of high reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. In certain particular cases, this dedicated message could be displayed when the radar is not detecting any vehicles or objects within its view range.

If atmospheric conditions are not the real reason behind this message, check if the sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to clean or remove any obstructions in the area. If the message appears often, even in the absence of atmospheric conditions such as snow, rain, mud or other obstructions, contact an authorized dealer for a sensor alignment check. In the absence of visible obstructions, manually removing the decorative cover trim and cleaning the radar surface could be required. Have this operation performed at an authorized dealer.

Note: It is recommended that you do not install devices, accessories or aerodynamic attachments in front of the sensor or darken it in any way, as this can compromise the correct functioning of the system. Frontal Collision Alarm With Active Braking If Equipped If this function is selected, the brakes are operated to reduce the speed of the vehicle in the event of potential frontal impact. This function applies an additional braking pressure if the braking pressure applied by the driver does not suffice to prevent potential frontal impact.

76

S A

FE TY

The function is active with speed above 4 mph (7 km/h). Driving In Special Conditions In certain driving conditions, such as, for example:

Driving close to a bend.

The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout.

Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane.

Lane change by other vehicles.

Vehicles travelling at right angles to the vehicle. System intervention might be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore be very careful, keeping control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety.

Note: In particularly complex traffic conditions, the driver can deactivate the system manually through the Information and Entertainment System. Driving Close To A Bend When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system may detect a vehicle in front you, but not driving on the same driving lane. In cases such as these, the system may intervene.

The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A Roundabout On a roundabout, the system could intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead which is leaving the roundabout.

Vehicles With Small Dimensions And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane The system cannot detect vehicles in front of you but outside the range of the radar sensor and may therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

Driving Around Wide Curves

Driving In Roundabouts

Driving Near Small Vehicles

77

Lane Change By Other Vehicles Vehicles suddenly changing lane, entering the driving lane of the vehicle and inside the radar sensor operating range, may cause system activation.

Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To The Vehicle The system may temporarily react to a vehicle that is passing through the radar sensors operating range at right angles.

Warning!

The system has not been designed to prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in advance. Failure to take into account this warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries.

The system may activate, assessing the trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of reflecting metal objects different from other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, level crossings, gates, railways, objects near road constructions sites or higher than the vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the system may intervene inside multi-story parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on the road surface. These possible activations are a consequence of

the real driving scenario coverage by the system and must not be regarded as faults.

The system has been designed for road use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, the system must be deactivated to avoid unnecessary warnings. Automatic deactivation is signaled by the dedicated warning light/symbol switching on in the instrument panel (refer to the instructions in the "Warning Lights And Messages On The Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel" for further information).

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that sends the inflation pressure information of each tire to the control unit, and will signal the driver in the event of insufficient tire pressure. Tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (6.5C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The

Other Vehicles Changing Lanes

Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar Range

78

S A

FE TY

cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for information on how to properly inflate the vehicles tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will signal the driver if pressure falls below the warning limit for any reason, including the effects of low temperature and normal loss of pressure from the tire. The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient tire pressure when pressure is equal to or greater than the prescribed cold inflation level. Therefore, if insufficient tire pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning light displaying in the instrument cluster, increase the inflation pressure up to the prescribed cold inflation value. The system will automatically update, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Operating Example For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C), and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicles recommended cold placard pressure value.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature operation.

Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

79

INSUFFICIENT TIRE PRESSURE INDICATION If an insufficient pressure value is detected on one or more tires, the

warning light in the instrument cluster will display alongside the dedicated messages, the system will highlight the tire or tires with insufficient pressure graphically, and an acoustic signal will be emitted. In this case, stop the vehicle, check the inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate the necessary tire or tires to the correct cold inflation pressure value, shown on the display or in the dedicated TPMS menu.

TPMS TEMPORARILY DISABLED

TPMS Check Message When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provided that the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors. After the punctured tire has been repaired with the original tire sealant contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the previous condition must be restored so that the warning light is off during normal driving.

TPMS Deactivation The TPMS can be deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes

above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message in the instrument cluster. Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, as long as no system fault exists.

80

S A

FE TY

Note:

The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire will cause the tire to overheat, and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems Features

Seat Belt Systems

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information).

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to Child Restraints in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

81

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the Customer Assistance section for customer service contact information.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert If Equipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard

front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert

82

S A

FE TY

warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

Note: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

Warning!

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.

Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.

Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

Warning!

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces wont be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

83

A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you cant straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.

A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat Belt Buckle

84

S A

FE TY

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions

The second row center seat belt features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the parcel tray for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a click.

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

Second Row Seat Belts

1 Seat Belt Buckle 2 Seat Belt Latch Plate 3 Mini Latch Plate 4 Mini Seat Belt Buckle 5 Mini Buckle Release

85

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

Warning!

If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

86

S A

FE TY

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

Note:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature

The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound

as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.

ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

87

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Warning!

The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.

Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A

88

S A

FE TY

single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.

The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

Note:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Warning!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you wont have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to Warning Lights And Messages in the Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel section of this manual.

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

Driver Air Bag

89

Warning!

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

Warning!

No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may

Passenger Air Bag

90

S A

FE TY

produce substantial vehicle damage for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

Warning!

Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.

Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.

Driver Knee Air Bag

Front Passenger Knee Air Bag

91

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatbacks trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

Warning!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG.

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label

Location

92

S A

FE TY

Warning!

Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.

In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

Warning!

Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

Warning!

Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags wont deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags.

Note:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Side Impacts In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side 93

Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Rollover Events Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:

Air Bag System Components

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

Air Bag Warning Light

Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Knee Air Bags

Front and Side Impact Sensors

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Seat Track Position Sensors

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

Note:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you havent healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

94

S A

FE TY

Warning!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Note:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

Cut off fuel to the engine.

Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.

Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.

Unlock the power door locks.

Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater (if equipped).

Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.

Cut off battery power to the:

Engine

Electric power steering

Brake booster

Electric park brake

Automatic transmission gear selector

Horn

Front wiper

Headlamp washer pump

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or

MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Action

Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Must be placed in Neutral State).

2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/ RUN.

Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light BLINKS.

95

Customer Action

Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

4. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS.

5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is ON SOLID.

6. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light BLINKS. Left turn light is OFF.

7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light BLINKS.

8. Place turn signal in neutral state.

Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light BLINKS.

9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON SOLID. Left turn light is ON SOLID.

Customer Action

Customer Will See

Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds

10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).

Right turn light is OFF. Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.

12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/ RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).

System is now reset and the engine may be started.

Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).

If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

Warning!

Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/ tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

96

S A

FE TY

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Note: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

97

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

Warning!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owners Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owners Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

Note:

For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/parents/ index.htm or call: 18883274236

Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canadas website for additional information: http:// www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/ safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

98

S A

FE TY

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicles seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often

have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

Warning!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.

99

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicles seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the childs back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

Warning!

Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicles seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the childs shoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs and not their stomach?

100

S A

FE TY

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? If the answer to any of these questions was no, then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A childs squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined Weight of the Child + Child

Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An X Below

LATCH Lower Anchors Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Rear-Facing Child Restraint

More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X

101

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor

points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicles seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

LATCH Label LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

102

S A

FE TY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

No

Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owners manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorage? No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child

seat in the center seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No

Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owners manual for more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints can be removed.

103

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position

located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Warning!

Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

LATCH Anchorage Locations

1 LATCH Anchorage Bar 2 LATCH Anchorage Locations

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

104

S A

FE TY

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the childs reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

Warning!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

105

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the

retractor. Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description in Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) under Occupant Restraint Systems for additional information on ALR. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (childs weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints can be removed.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

106

S A

FE TY

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

Warning!

Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage:

Warning!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

107

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.

3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturers instructions.

Warning!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

Upper Tether Anchorage Location

108

S A

FE TY

SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

Warning!

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

Warning!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or

rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

109

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the pedal assemblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the

floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

Warning!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.

ONLY use the drivers side floor mat on the drivers side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.

ONLY use the passengers side floor mat on the passengers side floor area.

ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the drivers side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.

NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.

If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.

It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

110

S A

FE TY

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

111

112

This page is intentionally left blank

STARTING AND OPERATING

Lets get to the core of the vehicle, and see how you can explore its fullest potential. Well look at how to drive safely in any situation, making it a welcome companion with our comfort and wallets in mind.

STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .114 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE . . . . . . .115 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .117 ALFA DNA / PRO SELECTOR . . . .119 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .120 STOP/START SYSTEM . . . . . . . .121 SPEED LIMITER . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . .122 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .125 PARK SENSORS SYSTEM . . . . . .133 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES . . . . . . . .136 REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . .138

113

STARTING THE ENGINE Before starting the engine, be sure to adjust the seat, the interior rear view mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten the seat belt correctly. Never press the accelerator pedal before starting the engine. If necessary, messages indicating the starting procedure can be shown in the display.

Warning!

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

Starting Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the electric park brake and set the gear selector to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

2. Fully depress the brake pedal without touching the accelerator.

3. Briefly push the ignition button.

4. If the engine doesn't start within a few seconds, you need to repeat the procedure. If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer.

Warning!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Emergency Starting in In Case Of Emergency for further information.

Caution!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds before trying again.

If Engine Fails To Start

Starting The Engine With Key Fob Battery Run Down Or Drained If the ignition does not respond when the button is pushed the key fob battery might be run down or drained. Therefore, the system does not detect the presence of the key fob in the vehicle and displays a dedicated message.

114

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Stopping The Engine

To stop the engine, proceed as follows:

1. Park the vehicle in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic.

2. Engage the PARK (P) mode.

3. With engine idling, press the START/STOP button on the steering wheel to STOP the engine.

Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON mode when the engine is off. To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or push the START/STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the ignition will be placed in the ON mode.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE The vehicle is equipped with electric park brake to guarantee better use and optimal performance compared to a manually operated park brake. The electric parking brake features a switch located on the center console, a motor with caliper for each rear wheel, and an electronic control module.

The electric parking brake can be engaged in two ways:

Manually, by pulling the switch on the center console.

Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto Park Brake" conditions.

Note:

Normally, the electric parking brake is engaged automatically when the engine is stopped. This function can be deactivated/activated on the Information and Entertainment system by selecting the following items in sequence on the main menu: "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic Parking Brake".

In addition to engaging the electric park brake, along with steering and positioning chocks in front of the wheels (when on a steep slope), you must always place the vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before leaving.

Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery must be replaced in order to unlock the electric park brake.

Engaging The Park Brake Manually Briefly pull the switch located on the center console to manually engage the electric park brake when the vehicle is stationary. Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle when engaging the electric parking brake.

Electric Park Brake Switch

115

A slight movement of the brake pedal may be detected when engaging the electric parking brake with the brake pedal pressed. With the electric parking brake engaged, the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel and the switch will illuminate.

Caution!

With the Electronic Parking Brake failure warning light on, some functions of the electric parking brake are deactivated. In this case the driver is responsible for brake activation and vehicle parking in complete safety conditions.

If, under exceptional circumstances, the use of the brake is required with the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the center console pulled as long as the brake action is necessary. The BRAKE warning light may turn on with the hydraulic system temporarily unavailable, in this case braking is controlled by the motors. The brake lights will also automatically turn on in the same way as for normal braking with the use of the brake pedal. Release the switch on the center console to stop the braking action with the vehicle in motion.

If, through this procedure, the vehicle is braked until a speed below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept pulled, the park brake will definitively engage.

Note:

Driving the vehicle with the electric parking brake engaged, or using it several times to slow down the vehicle, may cause severe damage to the braking system.

Disengaging The Electric Park Brake Manually In order to manually release the park brake, the ignition should be in the ON mode. Press the brake pedal, and then push the switch on the center console briefly. Noise may be heard from the rear of the vehicle, and a slight movement of the brake pedal may be detected during disengagement. After disengaging the electric parking brake, the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel and the light on the switch will turn off. If the BRAKE warning light on the instrument panel remains on with the electric parking brake disengaged, this indicates a fault: in this case, contact an authorized dealer.

Warning!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.

Always fully apply the park brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury.

Caution!

Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of the electric parking brake. Always engage the electric parking brake when parking the vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused by the unexpected movement of the vehicle.

116

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Electric Park Brake Operating Modes

The electric park brake may operate as follows:

"Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode is activated by pulling the switch repeatedly while driving.

"Static Engagement and Release Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the electric park brake can be activated by pulling the switch on the center console once. On the other hand, push the switch and the brake pedal at the same time to disengage the brake.

"Drive Away Release" if equipped: the electric park brake will automatically disengage with the driver side seat belt fastened and the detection of an action performed by the driver to move the vehicle (forward gear or reverse gear).

"Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear selector is not in PARK (P) position and the driver's intention of leaving the vehicle is detected, the electric park brake will automatically engage to hold the vehicle in safety conditions.

"Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric park brake will automatically engage when the gear selector is in PARK (P) position. The light on the switch located on the center console switches on together with the BRAKE

warning light on the instrument panel when the park brake is engaged and applied to the wheels. Each automatic park brake engagement can be cancelled by pressing the switch on the center console and at the same time moving the gear selector for the transmission to position PARK (P).

Safe Hold

Safe Hold is a safety function that automatically engages the electric park brake in the event of a dangerous condition for the vehicle. The electric park brake engages automatically to prevent vehicle movement if:

The vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3 km/h).

A transmission operating mode different from PARK (P) is activated.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened. The driver side door is open. No attempts to apply pressure on the

brake pedal have been detected. The Safe Hold function can be temporarily disabled by pressing the switch located on the center console and the brake pedal at the same time, with the vehicle stationary and the driver side door open. Once disabled, the function will activate again when the vehicle speed reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to STOP and then to ON.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The vehicle can be equipped with an electronically controlled 8-speed automatic transmission where gear shifting automatically takes place, depending on the vehicle usage instantaneous parameters (vehicle speed, grade, and accelerator pedal position). The new transmission is an absolute innovation, as it can match the Stop/Start system with the traditional automatic transmissions with built-in torque converter. For further information, refer to the Stop/Start section within this chapter. Manual gear shifting can still occur thanks to the "sequential mode" position for the gear selector.

Warning!

It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

117

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition STOP/OFF. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the AVV or ON mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Caution!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:

Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this condition, the transmission stays in fourth gear, regardless of the selected gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL (N) still work. The symbol might light up in the instrument cluster.

Temporary failure In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns OFF.

4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then restart the engine.

5. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

Note: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could reoccur. If the transmission cannot be reset, service is required at your authorized dealer.

118

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

ALFA DNA / PRO SELECTOR Alfa DNA / Pro System

This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA / Pro system lever (located on the center console). There are up to four modes of operation to be selected according to driving style and road conditions:

d = Dynamic (sports driving mode) n = Natural (mode for driving in

normal conditions) a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving

mode for maximum fuel savings). RACE = track race driving mode

(RACE mode is Quadrifolgio exclusive). = adjusts the calibration of the

suspensions (if equipped).

Unlike the other modes, the RACE position is unstable, therefore, by rotating the selector to RACE, it will return to its initial position "d". The symbol of the active mode lights up in red on the selector. On the instrument panel display, the different modes are characterized by different colors:

Natural - Blue Dynamic - Red Advanced Efficiency - Green RACE - Yellow (RACE mode is

Quadrifolgio exclusive)

The different driving modes are graphically different from the color of the frames and the contents only on the "performance" screens.

Driving Modes

"Natural" Mode

Activation/Deactivation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "n", the displays light up in blue. To deactivate the Natural mode, move the selector to another mode ("d" or "a").

"Dynamic" Mode

Activation/Deactivation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "d", the displays light up in red. To deactivate the Dynamic mode, move the selector to "n", Natural mode.

RACE Mode If Equipped

Activation/Deactivation It is activated by rotating the selector to position "RACE", the displays light up in yellow.

Note:

It is recommended to activate this mode at the track.

Alfa DNA Pro System Selector

Mode Display

119

To deactivate the RACE mode, take the selector to position "RACE" again and the system will be set to "d", Dynamic mode.

"Advanced Efficiency" Mode

Activation/Deactivation It is activated by rotating the selector to the letter "a", the displays light up in green. To deactivate the Advanced Efficiency mode, move the selector to "n", Natural mode.

Note: When the engine is next started, the

"Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and "Natural" mode selected previously is retained. The system will reactivate in "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or "Natural" mode, depending on which mode was selected before the engine was stopped.

When the engine is next started, the "RACE" mode selected previously is not retained. The system will reactivate in "Dynamic" mode.

It is not possible to go directly from "Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You must always activate the Natural mode first and then select the other mode.

ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) IF EQUIPPED The vehicle's electronic suspension management system is aimed at optimizing the vehicle's performance. The system continuously monitors the damping of the suspension through the actuator installed on each shock absorber. The calibration of the shock absorbers can be adjusted to the conditions of the road surface and to the dynamic conditions of the vehicle, improving its comfort and road handling. Even while driving, the driver can choose between two types of suspension calibration: a more sporty ride or a more comfortable one. This is only available in "d", or "RACE" mode (RACE mode is Quadrifolgio exclusive). By pushing the button, the system will work with the shock absorber calibration which favors driving comfort.

If the system fails, the following symbol will appear in the instrument cluster display .

Alfa Active Suspension Button

120

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

STOP/START SYSTEM Stop/Start System

The Stop/Start system automatically shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine. The function was developed to increase vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel consumption, gas emissions, and sound pollution.

Operating Mode

Stopping the Engine With vehicle at a standstill and brake pedal pressed, the engine switches off if the gear selector is in a position other than REVERSE (R). The system does not operate when the gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to making parking maneuvers easier. In the event of stops uphill, engine switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works only with running engine).

NOTE: The engine can only be automatically stopped after having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an automatic restart, the vehicle only needs to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) to stop the engine. Engine stopping is signaled by the

symbol lighting up on the instrument cluster display.

Restarting the Engine To restart the engine, release the brake pedal. With brake pressed, if the gear selector is in automatic mode - DRIVE (D) - the engine can be restarted by moving the gear selector to REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N) or "AutoStick". With brake pressed, if the gear selector is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine can be restarted by moving the gear selector to "+" or "", or REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N). When the engine has been stopped automatically, keeping the brake pedal pressed, the brake can be released keeping the engine off by quickly shifting the gear selector to PARK (P). To restart the engine, just move the gear selector out of a position other than PARK (P).

System Manual Activation/Deactivation

To manually activate/deactivate the system, push the button located in the control panel on the left of the steering wheel.

Light off: system activated. Light on: system deactivated.

Stop/Start Button

121

SPEED LIMITER Description

This feature allows the speed of the vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can be set by the driver. The maximum speed can be set with the vehicle stationary or in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph (30mk/h). When this feature is active, the vehicle speed depends on the pressing of the accelerator pedal until the programmed speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit Programming" paragraph).

Activating The Device

The feature can be activated/ deactivated through the Information and Entertainment System. Activating The Device To access this feature on the main menu, select the following items in sequence: "Settings", "Safety", Speed Limiter and on. The activation of this feature is signaled by the displaying of the green symbol along with the last speed set.

Speed Limit Programming

To access the function, on the main menu select the following items in sequence: "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter Set Speed". By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed increases by 3 mph (5 km/h), from a minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h).

Deactivating The Device

Deactivating The Device To access this feature on the main menu, select the following items in sequence: "Settings", "Safety", "Speed Limiter" and "off".

Automatic Deactivation Of The Device The device deactivates automatically in the event of fault in the system. In this case, contact an authorized dealer.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) Electronic Speed Control Description

This is an electronically controlled driving assistance feature that allows the desired vehicle speed to be maintained, without having to press the accelerator pedal. This feature can be used at a speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long stretches of dry, straight roads with few variations (highways). The speed control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel.

Note:

To ensure correct operation, the speed control is designed to deactivate if more than one function is operated simultaneously. In this case, the system can be reactivated by pushing the on/off button and setting the desired speed.

It is not recommended to use this feature in city traffic.

While driving downhill, the system could brake the vehicle to keep the set speed the same.

122

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Warning!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

Activating

To activate the Electronic Speed Control System, push the on/off button location on the left side of the steering wheel.

The activation of the system is signaled by the white warning light switching on the instrument cluster.

The Electronic Speed Control function can remain active at the same time as the Speed Limiter System. If a speed limit below the one indicated in the set speed control, the speed control speed will be lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This function remains available in RACE mode.

Note: The system cannot be engaged in FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using the Autostick feature.

Warning!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

Setting The Desired Speed

To set a desired speed, proceed as follows:

1. Turn the Electronic Speed Control on.

2. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET switch up or down and release to activate. When the accelerator is released, the vehicle will keep the selected speed automatically.

If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can accelerate beyond the set speed by pressing the accelerator. When you release the pedal, the vehicle goes back to the previously set speed. When traveling downhill with the system active, the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the set one.

Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the vehicle must be traveling at a constant speed on a flat surface.

Electronic Speed Control On/Off Switch

Set Switch Location

123

Increasing/Decreasing Speed

Increasing Speed Once the Electronic Speed Control has been activated, the speed can be increased by pushing the SET switch upward. By keeping the button pushed, the set speed will increase until the button is released. The new speed will then be set. At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted.

Decreasing Speed When the feature is active, to reduce the speed, push the SET switch downward. By keeping the button pushed, the set speed will decrease until the button is released. The new speed will then be set. At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted.

Note: Moving the SET switch allows to adjust the speed according to the selected unit of measurement set on the Information and Entertainment System (see dedicated supplement).

Accelerating When Overtaking Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes The feature can automatically downshift to keep the set speed when driving on hilly routes. On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed may be considerable and is advisable to deactivate the Electronic Speed Control.

Note: The feature keeps the speed set even uphill and downhill. A slight variation in the speed on slight rises is completely normal.

Recalling The Speed Note: Before returning to the previously set speed, you must accelerate to a speed close to that speed, then push the RES button and release it.

While in DRIVE (D), push and release the RES button to recall the previously set speed.

In Autostick (sequential) mode, before recalling the previously set speed, you should accelerate until you are close to that speed. Then, push and release the RES button.

Resume Button Location

124

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Deactivating

Lightly pressing the brake pedal deactivates the speed control without deleting the set speed. The speed control may also be deactivated by applying the electric park brake or when the braking system is operated (e.g. operation of the ESC system). The set speed is deleted in the following cases:

Pushing the on/off button twice.

The ignition is cycled to the STOP position

If there is a malfunction with the Electronic Speed Control.

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) IF EQUIPPED System Description

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver assist system that combines the speed control functions for controlling the distance from the vehicle ahead. The system allows to set and hold the vehicle at the desired speed without needing to press the accelerator. It also allows to set and hold a distance from the vehicle ahead (these settings are set by the driver). The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a radar sensor located behind the front bumper and a camera located in the center/upper part of the windshield, to detect the presence of a vehicle close ahead.

This system enhances driving comfort while on the highway or out of town with light traffic. If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead, the system will maintain a fixed set speed. If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the device automatically intervenes by braking (or accelerating) slightly in order not to exceed the original set speed, so that the vehicle keeps the preset distance, seeking to adapt to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Front Bumper Radar Location

Windshield Camera Location

125

Note:

Adaptive Cruise Control performance is not guaranteed under the following circumstances, and it is recommended to turn the system off when:

Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow

Driving in heavy traffic or construction zones

Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, roads with steep climbs and descents, or roads with numerous turns and bends

Entering a turn lane

Towing a trailer

When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed

Warning!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the drivers responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

The ACC system: Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be canceled.

You should switch off the ACC system: When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy

snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).

When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.

When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

Activation/Deactivation

The system has four operating states:

Enabled (speed not set)

Activated (speed set)

Paused

Deactivated

126

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Enabling/Activating To enable the system, push and release the button located on the left side on the steering wheel.

When the system is enabled and ready to operate, the display shows the white icon above dashes in place of the speed.

Setting a speed activates the system. The display shows the icon in green with the set speed.

Note:

The system cannot be enabled when RACE mode is active.

Warning!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

Pausing/Deactivating With the feature enabled (speed not set), push the button to disable. With the feature active (speed set), push the button to pause. The display will show the icon in white with the speed in brackets. To deactivate the feature, push the button a second time.

Setting The Desired Speed

The speed can be set from a minimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 110 mph (180 km/h).

When the vehicle reaches the desired speed, push the SET switch upward or downward and release it to activate the system. When the accelerator is released, the vehicle will maintain the set speed automatically.

While the accelerator pedal is pressed, the system will not be able to control the distance between the vehicle and the one ahead. In this case, the speed will be determined only by the position of the accelerator pedal. The system will return to normal operation as soon as the accelerator pedal is released. The system cannot be set:

When pressing the brake pedal.

When the brakes are overheated.

On/Off Button

Enabled Icons

SET Switch

127

When the electric park brake has been operated.

When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or NEUTRAL (N) is engaged.

When the engine rpm is above a maximum threshold.

When the vehicle speed is not within the operational speed range.

When the ESC (or ABS or other stability control systems) are operating or have just operated.

When the ESC system is off.

When the Forward Collision Warning system (if equipped) is braking automatically.

In the event of system failure.

When the engine is OFF.

In case of obstruction of the radar sensor (in this case the bumper area where it is located must be cleaned). If the system is set, the conditions described above also cause a cancellation or deactivation of the system. These situations may vary according to the conditions.

Note:

The system will not be deactivated when speeds higher than those set are reached by pressing the accelerator pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In these situations, the system may not work correctly and it is recommended to deactivate it.

To Vary The Speed Setting

Increasing Speed Once the system has been activated, you can increase the speed by lifting the SET switch. Each time it is operated, the speed increases by 1 mph. By holding the button up, the set speed will increase in increments of 5 mph until the button is released. Then, the new speed will be set.

Decreasing Speed Once the system has been activated, you can decrease the speed by lowering the SET switch. Each time it is operated, the speed decreases by 1 mph. By holding the button down, the set speed will decrease in increments of 5 mph until the button is released. Then, the new speed will be set.

Note:

Moving the SET switch allows you to adjust the speed according to the selected unit of measurement ("US" or "metric") set on the Information and Entertainment System (see dedicated supplement)

When the unit of measurement is set to metric, holding the SET switch the speed will change in 10 km/h increments

By keeping the accelerator pedal depressed, the vehicle can continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. In this case, use the SET switch to set the speed to the vehicles current speed

When you push the SET button to reduce the speed, the braking system intervenes automatically if the engine brake does not slow the vehicle down sufficiently to reach the set speed. The device holds the set speed uphill and downhill; however a slight variation is entirely normal, particularly on slight inclines

The transmission could change to a lower gear when driving downhill, or when accelerating. This is normal and necessary to maintain the set speed

128

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

The system will disable while driving if the brakes overheat

Accelerating When Overtaking

When driving with ACC activated and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side. The system detects the direction of traffic automatically when the vehicle passes from left-hand traffic to right-hand traffic. In this case, the overtaking assist function is only active when the reference vehicle is overtaken on the right. The additional acceleration is deactivated when the driver uses the right direction indicator and returns to the original lane.

Resuming The Speed

Once the system has been canceled but not deactivated, to resume a previously set speed, simply push the RES button and remove your foot from the accelerator to recall it. The system will be set to the last stored speed.

Before returning to the previously set speed, bring the speed close to that value, then push the RES button and release it.

Warning!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

Setting The Distance Between Vehicles

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar (short), two bars (medium), three bars (long), or four bars (maximum).

The distances from the vehicle ahead are proportional to speed. The interval of time with relation to the vehicle ahead remains constant and varies from one second (for the short distance one-bar setting) to two seconds (for the maximum distance four-bar setting). The set distance is shown on the display by a dedicated icon. The setting is four (maximum) the first time the system is used. After the distance has been modified by the

RES (Resume) Button

Distance Icons

129

driver, the new distance will be stored also after the system is deactivated and reactivated.

To Decrease The Distance Push and release the distance button to decrease the distance setting. The distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter) every time the button is pushed.

The set speed is held if there are no vehicles ahead. Once the shortest distance has been selected, the next push of the button will set the maximum distance. If a slower vehicle is detected in the same lane, the vehicle icon on the display illuminates from grey to white. The system automatically adjusts the

vehicles speed to keep the set distance, independently of the set speed. The vehicle holds the set distance until:

The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed higher than the set speed.

The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise Control system sensor.

The distance setting is changed. The Adaptive Cruise Control system

is deactivated/paused.

Warning!

The maximum breaking applied by the system is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in all cases if needed.

If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to hold the set distance, either BRAKE! or a dedicated message is displayed to warn the driver of approaching the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or objectives along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries.

The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead respecting the highway code in force in the respective country.

Stop And Go Function

The Stop and Go operating strategy allows you to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle has completely stopped. It will also restart the vehicle automatically if the vehicle ahead drives away within two seconds, otherwise it is necessary to press the accelerator pedal or push the RES button to restart.

Warning!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

Distance Button

130

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Deactivation

The system is deactivated and the set speed is canceled if:

The button on the Active Cruise Control is pushed (with the system enabled or paused).

The ignition is in STOP mode. RACE mode is activated.

The system is canceled (the set speed and distance are stored):

When the system is paused (Refer to the Activation / Deactivation section).

When the conditions shown in the Setting The Desired Speed section occur.

Limited Operation Warning

If the dedicated message is shown on the display, a condition limiting the Adaptive Cruise Control operation may have occurred. This could be due to an obstruction of the vehicles sensor or camera. It could also be due to a fault in the system. If an obstruction is detected, clean the area of the windshield opposite the interior rear view mirror, where the camera is located, as well as the area of the front bumper where the sensor is located. Then check that the message has disappeared.

When the conditions limiting the system functions end, normal operation will resume. Should the fault persist, contact an authorized dealer.

Precautions While Driving

The system may not work correctly in some driving conditions (see below). The driver must control the vehicle at all times.

Vehicle Not Aligned The system may not detect a vehicle traveling in the same lane, in the same direction, but is not aligned. It also may not detect a vehicle which is cutting in from a side lane. Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases. The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and out of the driving lane causing the vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Steering And Curves Driving on curves with the system set could limit speed and acceleration to guarantee vehicle stability, even if no vehicles are detected ahead. When leaving the curve, the system resets the previously set speed.

Note:

In cases of narrow curves, the performance of the system could be limited. In this case, it is advisable to deactivate the system.

The system only limits the speed DURING a bend and not BEFORE it.

Using The System On Slopes When driving on roads with a variable incline, the system may not detect the presence of a vehicle in the lane. System performance could be limited according to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes.

Steering And Curves

131

Lane Change The system may not detect the presence of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane.

In this case, sufficient distance from the vehicle which is changing lanes may not be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the utmost attention at all times and be always ready to apply the brakes if needed.

Small Vehicles Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and motorcycles) traveling near the outer edges of the lane or which enter the lane from curb side are not detected until they are fully in the lane.

Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases.

Stationary Objects And Vehicles The system cannot detect the presence of stationary vehicles or objects. For example, the system will not operate if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all times and be always ready to apply the brakes if needed.

Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction The system cannot detect the presence of objects or vehicles traveling in opposite or crosswise directions and consequently will not activate.

General Information

This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. The device may not cause harmful interference.

2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

Lane Change

Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction

132

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

PARK SENSORS SYSTEM Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only

The parking sensors, located in the rear bumper, detect obstacles while the vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle is detected, an acoustic alert will sound and visual indications will be displayed on the instrument cluster.

System Activation/Deactivation The system, when engaged, is automatically activated by engaging the REVERSE gear, while it is deactivated by engaging another gear.

Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors

The parking sensors, located in the front and rear bumpers, detect the presence of any obstacles and warn the driver through an acoustic signal and visual indications on the instrument cluster.

Engagement/Disengagement Of Park Sensors System To turn the system off, push the Park Sensors System switch located to the left of the headlight switch. The indicator light within the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. Pushing the switch a second time will turn the system back on, and the indicator light will turn off.

Indicator light within switch is off: System activated.

Indicator light within switch is on steady: System deactivated. The indicator light within the Park Sensors System switch will also be on in case of system failure. If the switch is pushed with a system failure, the indicator light will flash for

Rear Sensor Location

Front Sensor Location

Rear Sensor Location

Park Sensors System On/Off Switch

133

approximately five seconds. The light will then stay on constantly.

Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, the Park Sensors System keeps the last state when the engine was stopped (activated or deactivated) in its memory.

System Activation/Deactivation When the REVERSE gear is engaged and the system is on, the front and rear sensors are activated. If the vehicle moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, the rear sensors are deactivated, while the front sensors remain active until the speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded.

Note: Some conditions may influence the performance of the Park Sensors System:

Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or thick paint on the surface of the sensor.

The sensors may detect a false obstacle (echo interference) due to mechanical interference, for example when washing the vehicle or in extreme weather.

The signals sent by the sensors can be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle.

System performance can be influenced by the position of the sensors. For example, due to a change in the ride setting (caused by wear to the shock absorbers or suspension), by changing tires, overloading the vehicle or operations that require the vehicle to be lowered.

Be sure not to place bumper stickers or other adhesives over the sensors as this will affect system performance.

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Parking Sensor system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

The Parking Sensor system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity

The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Parking Sensor system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the Parking Sensor system.

134

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM Description

The Lane Departure Warning system uses a forward looking camera located on the windshield to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. When one or both lane limits are detected and the vehicle passes over one without an activated turn signal, the system emits a visual as well as an acoustic signal. If the vehicle continues to go beyond the line of the lane without any intervention from the driver, the surpassed line will light up on the display (left or right) to urge the driver to bring the vehicle back into the limits of the lane.

Caution!

Do not tamper with nor operate on the camera. Do not close the openings in the aesthetic cover located under the interior rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of the camera, contact an authorized dealer.

The camera may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windshield.

Camera operation may also be compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are driving not aligned with yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or opposite way on the same lane, bend with a small radius of curvature), by road surface conditions and by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield. The camera operation may also be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and road surface conditions.

If the windshield must be replaced due to scratches, chipping or breakage, contact exclusively an authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own. It is advisable to replace the windshield if it is damaged in the area of the camera.

System Activation/ Deactivation

The system is activated/deactivated by pushing the button located on the end of the multifunction lever.

Note: When the engine is started, the system maintains the operating mode that was selected when it was turned OFF.

Lane Departure Warning System Activation/Deactivation Button

135

Activation Conditions Once turned on, the system becomes active only if the following conditions are met:

The vehicle speed is above 37 mph (60 km/h).

The lane limit lines are visible at least on one side.

There are suitable visibility conditions.

The road is straight or with wide radius bends.

A suitable distance is kept from the vehicle in front.

The turn signal is not active.

REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES Description

The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just under the vehicles trunk lid, above the rear license plate.

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Information and Entertainment System display will show the area behind the vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-up Camera, along with a warning message.

Rear Back-Up Camera Features To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera features, select Settings from the Main Menu of the Information and Entertainment System. Under Driver Assistance, Rear Back-Up Camera features can be selected:

View

Camera Delay

Camera Guidelines Selecting View will activate the camera view on the display. Selecting Camera Delay will allow the camera view to remain on the display shortly after the vehicle is no longer in REVERSE, followed by the previously active screen.

Rear Back-Up Camera Location

Rear Back-Up Camera Display

136

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Selecting Camera Guidelines will activate the display of the dynamic guidelines that indicate the route of the vehicle.

Warning!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

Caution!

To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up Camera.

Symbols And Messages On The Display

Indications On The Display Through the Information and Entertainment System settings, by activating the "Camera Guidelines" feature, guidelines can be seen on the rear camera display. If activated, the guidelines are positioned on the image to highlight the width of the vehicle and the expected reverse path based on the steering wheel position. A superimposed central line indicates the center of the vehicle to assist in rear parking maneuvers. The various colored areas indicate the distance from the rear of the vehicle. The table below shows the approximate distances for each area:

Area Distance from the rear of the vehicle

Red 011.8 inches (030 cm)

Yellow 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet (30 cm1 m)

Green 3.3 feet or more (1 m or more)

Messages On The Display If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will not detect any obstacle behind the vehicle. The display will show a dedicated warning message. Make sure the trunk lid is closed by pushing next to the lock until it clicks.

Important Notes

Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to keep the camera surface clean, and free from debris.

When parking, be aware of obstacles that may be above or under the camera range.

137

REFUELING THE VEHICLE Refueling The Vehicle

Before refueling, make sure that the fuel type is correct. Also, stop the engine before refueling.

Note: An inefficient catalytic converter leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus contributing to air pollution.

Caution!

Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, even in small amounts in an emergency, as this would damage the catalytic converter beyond repair.

Refueling Procedure The fuel filler door is unlocked when the central door locking system is released, while it is automatically locked when the central locking system is applied.

Opening The Fuel Filler Door To refuel proceed as follows:

1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on the point shown by the arrow.

2. Remove the fuel filler cap.

3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe.

4. When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, before removing the nozzle, wait for at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel to flow inside the tank

5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten the gas cap about turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened. The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL) .

Fuel Door Fuel Door Label

138

S TA

R TI

N G

A N

D O

P E

R AT

IN G

Emergency Fuel Door Opening In the event of an emergency the fuel filler door can be opened by operating from inside the trunk. Proceed as follows:

1. Open the trunk and locate the emergency fuel filler release cap on the inside lining.

2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside to unlock the fuel filler door.

3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing on it (see the previous instructions).

Warning!

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.

Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

Note: If the filler compartment is washed with a pressure washer, keep it at a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm).

139

140

This page is intentionally left blank

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb?

At times, a problem such as these may interfere with your driving experience.

The section on emergencies can help you to deal with critical situations independently.

In an emergency, we recommend that you call the phone number found in the Warranty Book.

You may also consider contacting your nearest authorized dealer.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE . . . . . .142 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .142 BULB REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . .143 FUSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 TIRE REPAIR KIT IF EQUIPPED .152 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .155 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . .158 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . .159 TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . .162 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .162

141

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To contact Alfa Romeo Emergency Roadside Assistance Dial toll-free 18442532872 for U.S. Residents.

Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and your location, including the telephone number from which you are calling.

Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.

You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent, we will contact local police or safety authorities.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank below the radio screen.

Push the switch once to turn the hazard warning flasher on. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to

warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn the hazard warning flashers off.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the STOP position.

142

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

Note:

With extended use the hazard warning flashers may discharge your battery.

Caution!

Prolonged use of the hazard warning flashers may discharge the vehicles battery.

BULB REPLACEMENT General Instructions

Before replacing a bulb, check the contacts for oxidation.

Replace blown bulbs with others of the same type and power.

After replacing a headlight bulb, always check its alignment.

When a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse is intact before changing the bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to Fuses in this chapter.

Note:

In some particular climate conditions, such as low temperature, humidity, or after washing the car, a thin condensation layer may form on the internal surfaces of the front and rear headlights. This condensation will disappear after switching on the headlights.

Hazard Warning Switch

143

Types Of Bulbs

The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs

Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.

Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.

Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.

Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.

Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.

Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.

144

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

Replacement Bulbs

Light bulbs Type Power

Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W

Rear Fog lights H11 55 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W

Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W

Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W

Glove compartment light W5W 4 W

Deck lid light W5W 5 W

Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W

145

Replacing Exterior Bulbs

Note: Only replace the bulb when the engine is off. Also ensure that the engine is cold, to prevent the risk of burns.

Direction Indicators To change the bulb of these lights, proceed as follows:

1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective cover.

2. Remove protective cover.

3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off the headlight body.

4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder.

5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.

6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is locked correctly.

7. Install the protective cover.

Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights To replace the bulbs of the main beam headlights, contact your authorized dealer.

Caution!

Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

Protective Cover Location

Protective Cover

Bulb/Connector

146

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

FUSES Introduction

The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.

Fuse Extracting Pliers To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked to the trunk fusebox cover.

Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, press the tabs together, and extract the pliers pulling upwards. The pliers have two different ends, both of which are specifically designed to remove the different types of fuses present in the vehicle:

After use, return the pliers to their proper position by following the below procedures:

Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert them into their housing.

Push downward on the pliers into their housing until they click into place.

Warning!

When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.

If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.

If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

Fuse Location The fuses, which can be replaced by the user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the trunk.

Fuse Box

Fuse Extracting Pliers

1 MINI fuse 2 J-CASE fuse

147

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the two buttons.

2. Unscrew the two hooks, and remove the panel by pulling downward.

The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. After replacing the fuse, make sure that panel and footboard are correctly locked back into place.

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

To access the fuses, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the luggage compartment cover.

2. Remove the control unit cover.

The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. After replacing a fuse, make sure that you have closed cover correctly.

Release Buttons On Footboard

1 Footboard

Release Hooks On Footboard

2 Panel Control Unit

148

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Front power window (driver side) F33 25

Front power window (passenger side) F34 25

Passenger Side Control Unit

149

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port

F36 15

Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock if equipped), Doors unlock, Central lock F38 20

Windshield washer pump F43 20

Rear left power window F47 25

Rear right power window F48 25

Heater rear window coil F94 15

150

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

Luggage Compartment Fuse Box

FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE

Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40

Hi-Fi system F8 30

KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5

I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10

KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20

Luggage Compartment Control Unit

151

TIRE REPAIR KIT IF EQUIPPED Description

If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair using the Tire Repair Kit located in the rear storage area under the load floor.

Note:

Vehicles equipped with Run Flat Tires will not be equipped with a Tire Repair Kit.

The Tire Repair Kit includes:

Sealant cartridge containing the sealing fluid.

Filler tube.

Adhesive label with the writing "Max. 50 mph (80 km/h), to be attached in a

position easily visible to the driver (eg. on the dashboard) after repairing the tire.

Air compressor, complete with pressure gauge and connectors.

An instruction pamphlet for reference in prompt and correct use of the Tire Repair Kit, which must be then given to the personnel dealing with the sealant-treated tire.

A pair of protective gloves.

Some adaptors, for inflating different elements.

Note: The sealing fluid is effective with external temperatures of between -40F (-40C) and 122F (50C). The sealing fluid has an expiration date. To use the Tire Repair Kit, proceed as follows:

1. Stop the vehicle in a position where you can repair the tire safely. You should be as far as possible from the side of the road, and in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic. Engage the hazard warning flashers, remove the safety triangle from the luggage compartment, and place it at a suitable distance from the vehicle to make other drivers aware of your presence.

2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the tire repair kit hoses to reach the valve stem and keep the tire repair kit flat on the ground.

3. Shift the gear selector to PARK (P).

4. Apply the electric park brake and turn the engine OFF.

Tire Repair Kit Location

Tire Repair Kit Components

1 Sealant Cartridge 2 Filler Tube 3 Adhesive Label 4 Air Compressor

152

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

Inflation Procedure

Warning!

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.

Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:

If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage. If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. If the wheel has any damage. If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat sources.

A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.

Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

To use your Tire Repair Kit, proceed as follows:

1. Engage the electric parking brake.

2. Insert the sealant cartridge containing the sealing liquid in the proper compressor holder, pushing down hard. Unscrew the tire valve cap, take out the filler tube and tighten the ring nut on the tire valve.

3. Make sure the power switch of the compressor is in the off position (O).

4. Insert the plug into the power outlet in the center console, then start the engine.

Attaching Filler Tube To Deflated Tire

1 Sealant Cartridge 2 Filler Tube

Center Console Power Outlet 153

5. Start the compressor by placing the power switch in the on position (I).

6. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire placard, located on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers side door. Refer to Tires in Servicing And Maintenance for more information. In order to obtain a more precise reading, check the pressure value on pressure gauge with the compressor off.

7. If the pressure is not at least 26.1 psi (1.8 bar) after 15 minutes, disengage the compressor from the valve and power outlet. Then, move the vehicle forwards approximately five tire turns in order to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tire evenly, and then repeat the inflation operation.

8. If you still cannot obtain a pressure of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes from the compressor switching on, do not drive the vehicle, and contact an authorized dealer.

9. Drive the vehicle for about 5 miles (8 km), stop, engage the electric parking brake, and recheck the tire pressure.

10. If the pressure is less than 26 psi (1.8 bar), DO NOT drive the vehicle, and see an authorized dealer.

11. If a pressure value of at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) is detected, restore the correct pressure (with engine running and electric parking brake engaged), and drive immediately with great care to an authorized dealer.

Warning!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.

12. Apply the adhesive label from the sealant bottle where it can be easily seen by the driver as a reminder that the tire has been treated with a Tire Repair Kit, as well as not to exceed the speed restriction for the treated tire.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not operate (deploy) normally resulting in serious injury. In addition, do not adhere the sticker to areas where warning lights or the speedometer cannot be viewed.

Air Compressor

5 Power Switch 6 Pressure Gauge

154

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

Sealant Cartridge Replacement Note: Only use original cartridges, which can be purchased at an authorized dealer.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the sealant cartridge by pushing the release button located on the side of the compressor.

2. Insert the new sealant cartridge by pushing downward firmly.

JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

Note: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

Warning!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Caution!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

Remote Battery Connection Posts

The remote posts of the battery for jump starting can be found inside the engine compartment. The battery, on the other hand, is located in the luggage compartment.

Models With 2.0 T4 MAir Engine The negative remote post (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock inside the engine compartment.

Sealant Cartridge Replacement

1 Sealant Cartridge 9 Release Button

Remote Post Location

155

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

The positive post (+) can be accessed by removing the cover, and opening the protective flap. To carry out the operation, you need to

have the correct cables to connect to the battery of another vehicle or a portable battery booster pack to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at the ends and are identified by different sheath colors (red = positive, black = negative). Quadrifoglio Model The negative terminal (-) is positioned next to the passenger side hood lock.

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

The positive post (+) can be accessed by lifting the protective flap.

Protective Flap

Remote Post Location Remote Post Location

156

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

To carry out the operation, you need to have the correct cables to connect to the battery of another vehicle or a portable battery booster pack to the remote posts of the discharged battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at the ends and are identified by different sheath colors (red = positive, black = negative).

Jump Starting

Warning!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

Preparation For Jump Starting:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake, and turn the ignition to the STOP position.

2. Switch off all electrical features in the vehicle.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is in STOP position.

Warning!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

Cable Connection Proceed as follows to perform a jump starting procedure:

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery (exposed metal part of the engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

Protective Flap Opening

Remote Post Location

157

Warning!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If using a portable battery booster pack, before starting the vehicle, wait a few seconds after completing the connection.

Cable Disconnection Once the engine is started, remove the connection cables in reverse sequence, as described below:

1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine (-) ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

Caution!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicles battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicles battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY Refueling in an emergency is described in "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And Operating".

158

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. For information on contacting emergency service personnel, refer to Roadside Assistance in this section.

Caution!

The vehicle should be transported with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted. When towing with only the front (or rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the body, it could damage the transmission.

Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remain released, while being towed.

Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The operators of the assistance vehicle must be informed with regard to the vehicle's minimum height from ground in order to avoid contact between the ends of the bumpers with the equipment of the breakdown truck.

The following image illustrates the front and rear attachment corners of the vehicle, to be taken into consideration when loading the vehicle on the assistance vehicle.

RWD Models AWD Models Quadrifoglio Models

A 12.880 15.160 12.045

B 17.105 18.400 11.830

Front And Rear Loading Angles

159

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.

Caution!

Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed.

If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is not available, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels lifted from the ground using a trailer or special equipment allowing lifting of the rear wheels.

Four-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models

It is recommended to tow the vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed of a roadside assistance vehicle.

Caution!

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

TOW EYES If the vehicle has been in an accident or has broken down, a tow eye is provided in the tools container located inside the luggage compartment for vehicle towing. Towing is meant only for short distances on a paved road surface. Proceed as follows to use the tow eye:

1. Unhook the cap on the front or rear bumper (if equipped), pushing on the upper part.

Front Tow Eye Cap

160

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the trunk and carefully clean the threaded housing on the vehicle before using it.

3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place (about 11 turns).

Note: The largest work angle of a tow cable to fix on the tow hook must not exceed 15.

Warning!

Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes.

Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.

Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or death.

Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may cause components to break resulting in serious injury or death.

Caution!

The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device in accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service location.

Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow vehicles off the road or where there are obstacles.

In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed.

When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

Rear Tow Eye Cap Work Angle Of Tow Cable

161

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to Occupant Restraint Systems in Safety for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

162

IN C

A S

E O

F E

M E

R G

E N

C Y

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

Correct servicing permits the performance of the vehicle to be maintained over time, as well as limited running costs and safeguarding the efficiency of the safety systems.

This chapter explains how.

SCHEDULED SERVICING. . . . . . .164 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . .171 BATTERY RECHARGING . . . . . . .175 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .177 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . .178 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .195 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

163

SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct servicing is crucial for guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle under the best conditions. For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned a series of checks and services for your vehicle at fixed intervals based on distance and time, as described in the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Before each service, it is always necessary to carefully follow the instructions in the Scheduled Servicing Plan (e.g. periodically check level of fluids, tire pressure, etc.). Scheduled Servicing is offered by an authorized dealer according to a set time schedule. If, during each operation, in addition to the ones scheduled, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be carried out with the owners explicit consent only.

Note:

Scheduled Servicing intervals are required by the Manufacturer. Failure to have them carried out may invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. You are advised to inform your authorized dealer of any small operating irregularities without waiting for the next service.

Periodic Checks

Every month or every 600 miles ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check and, if necessary, top off:

Engine coolant level. Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see

your authorized dealer as soon as possible).

Windshield washer fluid level. Tire inflation pressure and condition. Operation of lighting system

(headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.).

Operation of windshield washing/wiping system and positioning/wear of wiper blades. Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and top off if required:

Engine oil level.

Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle

If the vehicle is used under one of the following conditions:

Dusty roads. Short, repeated journeys less than

4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside temperatures.

Engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity.

In the event of a long period of inactivity.

The following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Scheduled Servicing Plan:

Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

Visually inspect conditions of: engine, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.).

Check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte).

Visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts.

Check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace cabin air filter.

Check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPMs. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

164

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Maintenance Plan (2.9 V6 Engine)

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 0

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 11 2

12 8

14 4

16 0

17 6

19 2

20 8

22 4

24 0

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument.

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expiration date.

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.).

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels.(1)

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool).

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.).

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade.

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary.

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the Fluids And Lubricants section of the Technical Specifications chapter only after checking that the system is intact.

165

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 0

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 11 2

12 8

14 4

16 0

17 6

19 2

20 8

22 4

24 0

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage.

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicators.

Brake disc wear status check with diagnostic tool.

Visually inspect the brake discs surface and edge.

Brake pads/brake discs replacement. (2)

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the accessory drive belt(s).

Change engine coolant

Change engine oil and replace oil filter.

Replace accessory drive belt/s. (3)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (4)

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped).

(2) The actual interval for changing the brake pads and the carbon ceramic brake discs depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message on the instrument panel. It is advisable to check brake disc weight and thickness after each intensive use.

(3) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,00 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

(4) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). 166

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 0

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 11 2

12 8

14 4

16 0

17 6

19 2

20 8

22 4

24 0

Change the brake fluid. (5)

Replace the cabin air filter (6) o o o o o o o o

Spark plug replacement.*

(5) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. (6) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). * The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations () Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

167

Maintenance Plan (2.0 T4 MAir Engine)

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 0

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 11 2

12 8

14 4

16 0

17 6

19 2

20 8

22 4

24 0

Check battery charge status with the proper instrument

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expire date

Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, deck lid, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1)

Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) and, if equipped, engine oil degradation (2)

Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade

(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the Fluids And Lubricants section of the Technical Specifications chapter only after checking that the system is intact.

(2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.

168

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 0

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 11 2

12 8

14 4

16 0

17 6

19 2

20 8

22 4

24 0

Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary

Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicators

Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the accessory drive belt(s)

Change engine coolant

Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3)

Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only)

Replace accessory drive belt/s (4)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (5)

Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped)

(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles.

(4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years.

(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).

169

Thousands of miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0

11 0

12 0

13 0

14 0

15 0

Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Thousands of kilometers 16 32 48 64 80 96 11 2

12 8

14 4

16 0

17 6

19 2

20 8

22 4

24 0

Change the brake fluid (6)

Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o o o o o o o o

Spark plug replacement *

(6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. (5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). *The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearly intervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations () Mandatory operations

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

170

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.0 T4 MAir engine,

1 Engine Oil Filler 4 Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 5 Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

171

Quadrifoglio - 2.9 V6 engine,

1 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 Engine Oil Filler 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap Access Cover 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap

172

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Engine Oil The engine oil level can be seen on the instrument cluster display every time the engine is started, or on the Information and Entertainment system display by activating on the main menu (MENU button) the following functions in sequence: Apps; My Car and Oil Level. Check on the display using the 6 notches that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches MAX level. If the oil level is close to or below the MIN mark, add oil gradually through the filler, (refer to Top-up and oil level indication update on display in this section) considering that each notch shown on the display corresponds to approximately 8.8 fl oz (250 ml). The oil level can also be checked manually on 2.9L Quadrifoglio models.

Caution!

Make sure not to add too much oil when topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess may damage the engine. Have the vehicle checked. Never exceed the MAX level when topping off engine oil. It is advisable to check the oil level in intermediate steps using the oil dipstick (2.9L Quadrifoglio Only).

Caution!

The oil level is not refreshed immediately on the display after topping off. Consequently, wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the display and follow the procedure below.

Note:

Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is removed to add oil to engine. Never run the engine with cap removed this could cause oil to leak from engine.

Manual oil level checking procedure 2.9L Quadrifoglio Check that the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks on dipstick, clean it with a lint-free cloth and reinsert it. Extract the dipstick again and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.

Top-up and oil level indication update on display If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order to ensure the correct indication of the oil level on the display, leave the car on flat ground with the engine running for approximately 5 minutes (temperature higher than 176F (80C)) and shut the engine off then proceed with the process below:

2.0T 4 MAir start the engine again and idle it for about five minutes.

2.9L Quadrifoglio Wait for five minutes, turn the ignition to the ON mode without starting the engine and wait for a few seconds.

Note:

If you have added the specified amount of oil and the indicator is not reading Full, please contact you authorized dealer.

Warning!

If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for the engine to cool down before loosening the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk of burns!

Caution!

The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark. If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, go to your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the oil in excess removed. Do not add oil with specifications different from those of the oil already in the engine.

173

Used engine oil and oil filters contain substances which are harmful to the environment. To change the oil and filters, we advise you to contact your authorized dealer.

Engine Coolant Fluid If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of reservoir and add the fluid described in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Washer Fluid For Windshield/Headlights The windshield and headlights washer fluid reservoir (if equipped) has a telescopic filler. If the level is too low, remove reservoir cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid described in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.

Note:

The headlight washing system will not work if the liquid level is low (as indicated by the symbol on the instrument cluster display). The windshield washer will keep working. On vehicles equipped with headlight washers, if equipped, there is a reference notch on the dipstick: ONLY the windshield/rear window washer operates with the level below this reference.

Brake Fluid Check that the fluid is at the maximum level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, contact your authorized dealer to have the system checked.

Automatic Transmission Activation System Oil

The transmission control oil level should only be checked at your authorized dealer.

Useful Advice For Extending The Life Of Your Battery

To avoid draining your battery and make it last longer, observe the following instructions:

When you park the car, ensure that the doors and trunk are closed properly to prevent any lights from remaining on inside the passenger's compartment.

Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on for a long time when the engine is not running.

Before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable. If you wish to install electrical accessories after purchasing the car that require permanent electrical supply (e.g. alarm, etc.), or accessories which influence the electrical supply

requirements, contact your authorized dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate the overall electrical consumption.

Caution!

If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the battery may be damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity and efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is also more prone to the risk of freezing (at temperatures as high as 14F (-10C).

Note:

After the battery is disconnected, the steering must be initialized. The

warning light on the instrument panel switches on to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the other, and then turn it back to the central position.

Battery The battery does not require the electrolyte to be topped up with distilled water. A periodic check carried out at an authorized dealer, however, is necessary to check efficiency. Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance.

174

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Replacing The Battery If necessary, replace the battery with another original battery with the same specifications. Follow the battery manufacturers instructions for maintenance.

Warning!

Battery acid is a corrosive solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting in In Case Of Emergency for further information.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Note:

It will not be possible to open the trunk with a key or by pressing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk opening strap on the trunk lock before disconnecting the battery. The procedure is described in the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in this chapter.

BATTERY RECHARGING Important Notes

Warning!

Never charge or recharge a frozen battery: it may explode because of the nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals.

At all times while charging or recharging the battery, make sure that any sparks or open flames are kept sufficiently far away from the battery.

Note:

Before using the charging device, always make sure that it is appropriate for the installed battery, with constant voltage (below 14.8 V) and low amperage (maximum 15 A).

Recharge the battery in a well ventilated environment.

Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, carefully follow the instructions provided with the device in order to properly and safely connect it to the car battery.

175

You can recharge the battery without disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's electrical system.

To reach the battery, remove the access panel inside the trunk.

Remove the protective cover and connect the positive cable terminal of the charger (usually red) to the positive terminal (+) of the battery.

Connect the negative terminal of the charger (usually black) to nut next to the negative terminal (-) of the battery.

The vehicle is equipped with an IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able to measure the charge and discharge voltage and calculate the charge level and the general condition of the battery. The sensor is placed next to the negative terminal (-) of the battery. For a correct charge/discharge procedure, the charge voltage must go through the IBS sensor.

1. Turn the charger on and follow the instructions on the user's manual to completely recharge the battery.

2. When the battery is charged, turn the charger off before disconnecting it from the battery.

3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of the battery charger and then the red cable terminal.

4. Refit the protective cover of the positive terminal of the battery and the access cover to the battery compartment.

Note:

If a "quick-type" battery charger is used with the battery fitted on the vehicle, before connecting it disconnect both cables of the battery itself. Do not use a "quick-type" battery charger to provide the starting voltage.

Battery Access Panel

Battery

1 Protective Cover 2 Negative Post (Nut)

176

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

DEALER SERVICE The following pages contain instructions on the required maintenance from the technical personnel who designed the vehicle. In addition to these specific maintenance instructions specified for routine scheduled servicing, there are other components which may require periodic maintenance or replacement over the vehicles life cycle.

Air Conditioning System Maintenance

To ensure the best possible performance, the air conditioning system must be checked and undergo maintenance at an authorized dealer at the beginning of the summer.

Windshield Wiper

Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades ("Service Position" Function) The "service position" function allows the driver to replace the windshield wiper blades more easily. It is also recommended to activate this function when it is snowing and to make it easier to remove any dirt deposits in the area where the blades are normally positioned, when washing.

Activation Of The Function To activate this function disable the windshield wiper before setting the ignition device to STOP. This function can only be activated within 2 minutes of cycling the ignition to STOP. To activate this function, move the lever upwards for at least three seconds.

Function Deactivation The function is deactivated if:

More than two minutes passes before cycling the ignition to the STOP position after having raised the lever and putting the wipers into service position.

The ignition is cycled to the ON position, and the windshield wiper control is used.

If, after using the function, the ignition is set back to ON with the blades in a position other than rest position (at the base of the windshield), they will only return to rest position following a command given using the stalk (stalk upwards, into unstable position) or when a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.

Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades Proceed as follows:

1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the attachment spring and remove the blade from the arm.

Windshield Wiper Stalk

Wiper Release Tab

177

2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in the dedicated housing in the arm and checking that it is locked.

3. Lower the wiper arm onto the windshield.

Note: Do not operate the windshield wiper with the blades lifted from the windshield.

Windshield Washer The window washer nozzles are fixed. If there is no jet of fluid, first check that there is fluid in the reservoir (see paragraph Engine Compartment in this chapter). Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use a needle to unblock them if necessary.

RAISING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an authorized dealer which is equipped with shop jacks or jack arms. The vehicle lifting points are marked on the side skirts with the symbols.

TIRES Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

Vehicle Lift Point Locations

Tire Markings

1 U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)

4 Maximum Load

2 Size Desig- nation

5 Maximum Pressure

3 Service De- scription

6 Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

178

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Note:

P (Passenger) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

179

EXAMPLE:

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code

"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

180

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

181

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicles loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

182

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Note:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual.

Note:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to Vehicle Loading in the Starting And Operating section of this manual.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard

183

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if XXX amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

Note:

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

184

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

185

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

Tires General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety and Vehicle Stability

Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort

Safety

Warning!

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.

Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.

Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.

Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

Note:

Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

186

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

At least once a month:

Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

Caution!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12F (7C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12F (7C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

Warning!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

Warning!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

The tire has not been driven on when flat.

The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).

The puncture is no greater than a of an inch (6 mm). 187

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Warning!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

Tire Tread

1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire

188

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Warning!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Caution!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

189

Spare Tires If Equipped Note:For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to Tire Service Kit in In Case Of Emergency in your Owners Manual on www.alfaromeousa.com/ owners/owners-service-manuals for further information.

Caution!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

Warning!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

190

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Limited Use Spare If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Warning!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the drivers side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheels protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

Caution!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

Note:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

191

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels

Caution!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

Tire Types

All Season Tires If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40F (5C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/ snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Warning!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

192

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

Snow Chains

Rear Wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive Models 9 mm snow chains can be used on all tires with a width equal to or less than 225mm (225/50 R17, 225/45 R18, 225/40 R19). 7 mm chains can be fitted to 255/35 R19 tires. We recommend using snow chains available from your authorized dealer.

Note:

The snow chains may be applied only to the rear wheel tires.

Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few feet/meters have been driven.

Using snow chains with tires with non-original dimensions may damage the vehicle.

Using different size or type (M+S, snow, etc.) tires between front and rear axle may adversely affect vehicle driveability, with the risk of losing control of the vehicle and resulting accidents.

Quadrifoglio Models It is only possible to put chains on the rear 265/35 R19 tire (winter tire size). Avoid using traditional chains as they can damage the braking system if not installed correctly, thereby compromising the vehicles safety. We strongly advise using zero-clearance chains and to use equipment proposed by an authorized dealer.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

193

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

Warning!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

194

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

STORING THE VEHICLE If the vehicle is left inactive for longer than a month, the following precautions should be observed:

Park the vehicle in an area that is covered and dry, and well-ventilated if possible. Slightly open the windows.

Check that the electric park brake is not activated.

Carry out the procedure: manual trunk opening device procedure described in this paragraph.

Disconnect the negative battery terminal and check the battery charge. Repeat this check once every three months during storage.

If the battery is not disconnected from the electrical system, check its state of charge every thirty days.

Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax.

Clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds available commercially.

Sprinkle talcum powder on the windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift them off the glass.

Cover the vehicle with a fabric or perforated plastic sheet, paying particular care not to damage the painted surface by dragging any dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not use compact plastic sheets, as they do not allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the vehicle.

Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) above the standard prescribed pressure and check it periodically.

Do not drain the engine cooling system.

Any time the vehicle is left inactive for two weeks or more, operate the air conditioning system with engine idling for at least five minutes, setting external air and with fan set to maximum speed. This operation will ensure appropriate lubrication for the system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the compressor when the system is operated again.

Note:

After cycling the ignition to STOP and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition is in the STOP position and the driver side door is closed.

Manual Trunk Opening Device Proceed as follows if the battery needs to be disconnected:

1. From the trunk interior covering, rotate the plug to the left of the lock and extract the strap connected to it.

2. Make sure the free end of the strap remains outside the deck lid when closing the deck lid.

3. The trunk can now be opened manually by pulling the strap.

Note:

This procedure must be carried out exclusively in safe places because it allows to open the trunk unconditionally.

Trunk Compartment

195

BODYWORK Preserving The Bodywork

Paint Touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent the formation of rust. Some parts of the vehicle may be covered with a matt paint which, in order to be maintained intact, requires special care: see the instructions in the warning at the end of this paragraph. To correctly wash the vehicle, follow these instructions:

If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. Build up of water could cause damage to the vehicle in the long term.

It is advisable to position the wipers vertically (Service Position) to facilitate the removal of deposits of dirt from the area where the blades normally rest; for more information see Dealer Service in this chapter.

PARK (P) mode should not be activated when entering a car wash which moves the vehicle. Once correctly lined up in the car wash, with the car stopped and the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press the starter button for at least three seconds to turn off the engine.

196

S E

R V

IC IN

G A

N D

M A

IN TE

N A

N C

E

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Everything you may find useful for understanding how your vehicle is made and works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with data, tables and graphics. For the enthusiasts and the technician, but also just for those who want to know every detail of their vehicle.

IDENTIFICATION DATA. . . . . . . . .198 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . .201 BRAKES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . .204 DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 WEIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . .208 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . .209 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . . .211 PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .213

197

IDENTIFICATION DATA Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is stamped on a plate on the front left corner of the dashboard cover, which can be seen from outside the vehicle, through the windshield.

This number is also printed on the chassis at the front left shock absorber and can be seen by opening the engine compartment hood.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Plate

The plates are located on the left side A pillar and contain the data about:

Chassis number (VIN). Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle

(USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA

and Canada only).

Vehicle Identification Number

Vehicle Identification Number

198

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

ENGINE

2.9L V6 Engine

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 6 / V

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 86.5 82

Total displacement (cm) 2891

Compression ratio 9.3:1

Maximum power (SAE) (kW) 375

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 505

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 6500

Maximum torque (SAE) (Nm) 600

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft. lb) 443

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500

Fuel Gasoline with an octane number (A.K.I.) 91, ethanol percentage

is 015%. (*)

(*) To comply with all emission limits while simultaneously guaranteeing minimal consumption and maximum performance, use premium-quality unleaded gasoline with octane rating (A.K.I.) of 91 or higher.

199

2.0 T4 MAir Engine 280 HP

Cycle Four

Number and position of cylinders 4 in line

Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84 / 89.9

Total displacement (cm) 1,993

Compression ratio 10:1

Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280

Maximum power (kW) 209

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200

Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306

Maximum torque (Nm) 415

Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2,000 4,800

Fuel Gasoline with an octane number (A.K.I.) 91, ethanol percentage is 015%.

200

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

TRANSMISSION

Model Transmission Traction

2.9L V6 Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse Rear

or All-Wheel Drive

201

BRAKES

Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake

2.9 V6 Engine Disc or

Carbon Ceramic disc

Disc or

Carbon Ceramic disc Electric

2.0 T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric

Caution!

Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking.

202

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

SUSPENSION

Model Front Rear

2.9L V6 Engine Independent wheel double-wishbone suspension Independent wheel with multilink system

2.0L T4 MAir Engine Independent wheel double-wishbone suspension Independent wheel with multilink system

203

STEERING SYSTEM

Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type

2.9L V6 Engine 37.10 ft (11.30 m) Rack and pinion with electric power steering

2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m) Rack and pinion with electric power steering

204

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

DIMENSIONS Dimensions

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

A B C D E F G H I

31.30 111.02 40.47 182.80 56.54(+) 57.09(*)

61.30(+) 61.38(*)

63.98(+) 63.15(*)

79.69 73.23

(+) RWD models (*) AWD models Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims.

205

QUADRIFOGLIO Models

Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.

A B C D E F G H I

31.30 111.02 40.31 182.64 56.14 61.22 63.27 79.69 73.74

206

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

WEIGHTS

Weights (lbs) 2.9 V6 Engine 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With

AWD 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With

RWD

Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and without optional equipment)

3806 3632 3521

Payload including the driver (*) 905 905 905

Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 155 155

front axle 2260 2205 2205

rear axle 2646 2646 2646

total 4774 4723 4612

Towable loads

(*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.

207

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations, and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance, when

using high-quality unleaded Regular gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of Premium 91 octane gasoline or higher is recommended.

While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Materials Added To Fuel

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing

engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

208

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

FLUID CAPACITIES

2.9 V6 Engine 2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric U.S. Metric

Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters

Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters

Engine cooling system 2.95 Gallons 11.2 Liters 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters

Intercooler cooling system 1.4 Gallons 5.5 Liters 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters

Engine sump and filter 7.2 Quarts 7 Liters 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters

Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine

9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.8 Quarts

(AWD Model)

9.4 Liters (RWD Model) / 9.3 Liters (AWD Model)

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195

0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

Differentials and reduction gears RDU 230-TV

Main body: 0.8 Quarts Left TV: 0.5 Quarts

Right TV: 0.6 Quarts

Main body: 0.8 Liters Left TV: 0.5 Liters

Right TV: 0.6 Liters

209

2.9 V6 Engine 2.0 T4 MAir Engine

U.S. Metric U.S. Metric

RDU 230-LSD differential 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters

RDU 210-eLSD differential (if equipped) 1.4 Quarts 1.4 Liters

RDU 210/215-LSD differential 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters

AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters

AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters

210

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Engine Lubrication

Use Features Specification Replacement interval

Lubricant for engines 2.9 V6

SAE 0W-40 Pennzoil Ultra

API SN

FPT 9.55535-Z2 MS-12991

According to the Maintenance Plan

Lubricant for engines 2.0 T4 MAir

SAE 0W-30 API SN

MS-13340 9.55535-GS1

According to the Maintenance Plan

If lubricants conforming to the requested specification are not available, products that meets indicated features can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

211

Chassis Lubrication

Use Features Specification Applications

Lubricants and greases

ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF Automatic transmission

SAE 75W-85 API GL-5 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA8 Differential and reduction units

RDU 230-TV / 2.9 V6 engine

SAE 75W-85 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9

Differential RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU 210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD / 2.0 T4 MAir engine

SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case

SAE 75W synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE

Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes

Engine coolant CUNA NC 956-16 ASTMD3306 MS.90032

Use rate 50% Not mixable with different formulation products. (*)

Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 To be used diluted or undiluted in

windshield washer/wiper systems

HVAC R1234yf or R134yf (depending on market)

(*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.

212

TE C

H N

IC A

L S

P E

C IF

IC AT

IO N

S

PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.

Models Maximum speed mph Acceleration from 060 mph/

0-100 km/h sec.

2.9 V6 Engine 191 3.8

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP RWD engine 149 5.5

2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 149 5.1

213

214

This page is intentionally left blank

MULTIMEDIA

This chapter describes the main functions of the Information and Entertainment system 6.5, Information and Entertainment System NAV 6.5, and the Information and Entertainment Sysytem 3D NAV 8.8 system that can be equipped in your vehicle.

CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . .216 ROAD SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 RECEPTION CONDITIONS . . . . . .217 CARE AND MAINTENANCE . . . . .217 ANTITHEFT PROTECTION . . . . . .218 IMPORTANT NOTES . . . . . . . . . .218 CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . .225 RADIO (TUNER) MODE . . . . . . . .225 AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION . . . .226 MEDIA MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 BLUETOOTH SOURCE . . . . . . . .226 USB/IPOD MODE IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 PHONE MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 NAVIGATION MODE IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 VOICE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . .231

215

CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time, and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems, or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software is installed.

Warning!

It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicles systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or SD card) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.

As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

Note:

FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.

To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:

Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones or USBs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.

216

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

ROAD SAFETY Learn how to use the various systems and read the instructions carefully before operating the system.

Warning!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use these features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

RECEPTION CONDITIONS Reception conditions change constantly while driving. There may be reception interference when near mountains, tall buildings, or bridges, especially when you are far away from the broadcaster.

Note: The volume may change when receiving traffic information and news.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE Observe the following precautions to ensure the system is fully operational:

The display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which could damage its surface; use a soft, dry, anti-static cloth to clean and do not press down on the systems screen.

Never use alcohol, gasoline, or derivatives to clean the display lens.

Prevent any liquid from entering the system, as it could damage the system beyond repair.

Caution!

Only clean the front panel and the display with a soft, clean, dry, anti-static cloth. Cleaning and polishing products may damage the surface. Do not use alcohol or similar products to clean the panel or the display.

Do not use the display as a base for supports with suction pads or adhesives for external navigators or smartphones or similar devices.

217

ANTITHEFT PROTECTION The system is equipped with an antitheft protection system based on the exchange of information with the electronic control unit (Body Computer) on the vehicle. This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the system from being used on other vehicles if it is stolen. If necessary contact an authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT NOTES Only look at the screen when it is necessary and safe to do so. If you need to look at the screen for a long time, pull over to a safe place to avoid becoming distracted while driving. Immediately stop using the system in the event of a fault, or you could damage the system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the system repaired.

218

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

CONTROLS CONTROLS ON CONSOLE

CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob (1)

Action Function

LONG PRESS Turns the Information and Entertainment System on and off.

ROTATION Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the volume.

SHORT PRESS

Turns the system on, if it is off. In Radio mode: Activates/deactivates the Mute function. In Media mode: Activates play/pause and activates/deactivates the Mute function.

1 ON/OFF Control And Volume Knob 2 OPTION Button 3 Rotary Pad 4 MENU Button

219

Action Function

MOVE TO THE SIDE

In Radio mode:

Move to the right to seek to the next radio station.

Move to the left to seek to the previous radio station. In Media mode:

Move to the right to seek to the next track.

Move to the left to seek to the previous track.

OPTION Button (2) Pushing the "OPTION" button while within the modes RADIO, MEDIA, PHONE, or NAVIGATION will open the "Settings" screen of that particular mode. Press it again to go back to the previously selected mode.

Rotary Pad (3)

Action Function

ROTATION

Within the Menus: scrolls the menu items. Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): Rotate clockwise to zoom in on the map. Rotate counterclockwise to zoom out on the map.

PUSH Within the Menus: confirms the selection.

BRIEF MOVEMENT TO THE RIGHT Within the Menus: accesses the submenu of the selected function. Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): moves to the right on the map.

BRIEF MOVEMENT TO THE LEFT Within the Menus: returns to the previous menu; ESC function. Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): moves to the left on the map.

BRIEF UPWARD MOVEMENT

Within the Menus: enters the Multitasking menu and closes the preselection bar if open. Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): moves upwards on the map.

220

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

Action Function

BRIEF DOWNWARD MOVEMENT

Activates the radio preselection. Within the Menus: enters the preselection bar and closes the Multitasking menu if open. Within Point On Map, in Navigation mode (if equipped): moves downwards on the map.

Touchpad Controls If Equipped The top of the Rotary Knob is a touchpad device, and can be used to operate some of the controls.

Function Action Where

Open and Close Multitasking Menu

Scroll up

Anywhere (except where specified)

Touchpad Controls

221

Function Action Where

Open and Close the Preset Bar

Scroll down

Anywhere (except where specified)

Enter Letters, Symbols, and Numbers

Writing

Data input screens

Zoom

Movement to open and close

Point On Map

Drag

Scroll

Point On Map

222

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

MENU button (4) Opens the main menu.

CONTROLS ON STEERING WHEEL DESCRIPTION

The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier. The function selected is controlled, in some cases, by the length of the push (short or long push). The function is described in the table below.

STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE

Button (1)

Action Function

SHORT PRESS In Radio mode: selects the next radio station. In Media mode: selects the next track.

LONG PRESS In Radio mode: scan higher frequencies until released. In Media mode: fast forward the track.

MENU Button

1 Forward Seek Button 2 Back Seek Button 3 Voice Command Button 4 Phone Button 5 Volume Control

223

Button (2)

Action Function

SHORT PRESS In Radio mode: selects the previous radio station. In Media mode: selects the previous track.

LONG PRESS In Radio mode: scan lower frequencies until released. In Media mode: fast rewind.

Voice Command Button (3)

Action Function

SHORT PRESS Activate voice commands.

LONG PRESS Immediately closes Voice Recognition.

Phone Button (4) Answers/ends call or shows the recent calls list.

Volume Control (5)

Action Function

ROTATION Upwards: increases volume. Downwards: decreases volume.

SHORT PRESS In Radio mode: activates/deactivates the Mute function. In Media mode: activates play/pause and activates/deactivates the Mute function.

224

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

INTRODUCTION The system can be managed using the Rotary Pad.

Turn it to navigate the menus.

Push it to activate/confirm the selections.

Move it leftwards to go back to the previous screen.

RADIO (TUNER) MODE After the desired radio station is selected, the following information is shown on the display.

1 Control bar

Favorites

Next

Previous

Stations List

Search

Band

2 Name of the radio station being played and the favorite symbol if the station is stored in the list 3 Logo of the active frequency band 4 Transmitted program type 5 Current station frequency 6 Preset number (if the current station is stored)

Radio Mode

225

AUDIO SOURCE SELECTION

Warning!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use these features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

The following settings are available in the Audio menu present in the Options menu (Option button):

Bass

Treble

Mid

Balance/Fade

Speed Adjusted Volume

Surround Sound

AUX Volume Offset

Restore Settings

MEDIA MODE Note: Applications used on portable devices may be not compatible with the Information and Entertainment System.

Track Selection (Browse) With Media mode active, briefly press the Seek buttons to play the previous/next track or keep the Seek buttons pressed to fast rewind/forward the track.

BLUETOOTH SOURCE Pairing A Bluetooth Audio Device Proceed as follows:

Activate the Bluetooth function on the device.

Press the MENU button, and select the SETTINGS function by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad.

Select Infotainment.

Select Bluetooth.

Select "Add device".

Search for the Information and Entertainment system on the Bluetooth audio device (during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation).

Select the device to be paired.

When requested by the audio device, enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on the device the PIN displayed.

Media Mode

226

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

If the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a dedicated screen is displayed.

The Bluetooth can be reached also by pressing the OPTION button in the PHONE or MEDIA functions. The MEDIA function can be selected by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad in the main menu (MENU button).

Note: If the Bluetooth connection between mobile phone and system is lost, consult the mobile phone handbook.

USB/IPOD MODE IF EQUIPPED There might be up to three USB ports: one under the air conditioner control panel, one in the center console, and one (charge only) under the air vents on the back side of the center console. The AUX socket is located inside the glove compartment in the central console.

PHONE MODE PHONE mode can be activated from the main menu (MENU button) by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad.

The following control bar appears on the display:

Recent calls Favorites Contacts Dial

With call in progress: Disable Microphone End call

Note: The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the vehicles audio system; the system automatically mutes the system audio when the PHONE function is used.

Phone Mode

227

Pairing A Mobile Phone Proceed as follows:

Activate the Bluetooth function on the device

Press the MENU button, select the SETTINGS function by turning and pushing the Rotary Pad

Select Infotainment Select Bluetooth Select "Add device" Search for the Information and

Entertainment system on the Bluetooth audio device (during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation)

When requested by the audio device, enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on the device the PIN displayed

When the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a dedicated screen is displayed

The Bluetooth can be reached also by pressing the OPTION button in the PHONE or MEDIA functions. The latter can be selected by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad in the main menu (MENU button).

Making a phone call Proceed as follows:

select the "Recent calls" icon select the Contacts icon select the Dial icon

NAVIGATION MODE IF EQUIPPED

Note: In the interest of safety and to reduce distractions while you are driving, you should always plan a route before you start driving.

To plan a route, do the following: Activate NAVIGATION mode by

selecting it on the main menu Activate the Set destination

function To enter an address, select the item to add (Country, City). On the circular keypad, type the desired name, and the system automatically completes the word. The right of the display offers a list of options that apply to the entered letters. You can now either complete the word, or go to the list of

suggestions by tapping the Rotary rightward, or by pointing to OK, and pressing the Rotary Pad. Or

Select an address from the Recent destinations list. Or

Select an address from the Favorite destinations list.

Once the desired destination has been set, select "Start navigation". With navigation started, select one of the following options using the control bar on the display:

Stop Navigation: this allows to stop navigation

Navigation Volume Adjustment: this allows to set the volume of the messages

Edit Route: lets you refine your route choice, offering a series of options

Route Preview: this is used to see a preview of the planned route

Zoom: this allows to zoom into/out of the map

Point On Map: this allows to move inside the map

Navigation Mode

228

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

SETTINGS To access the user-programmable functions, open the main menu by pressing the MENU button, then select SETTINGS by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad. The following menu items can be found within SETTINGS:

Lights Units & Language Clock & Date Safety Driver Assistance Doors & Locks Cluster Infotainment System

Lights To access Lights settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Headlight Sensitivity Headlight Off Delay Cornering Lights Flash Lights with Lock Daytime Running Lights Greeting Lights Interior Ambient Lights Automatic High Beam Restore Settings

Units & Language To access "Units & Language" settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Units Language Restore Settings

Clock & Date To access "Clock & Date" settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Sync with GPS Time Set Time Time Format Set Date Restore Settings

Safety To access Safety settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Speed Limiter

This feature activates/deactivates the warning that indicates you have exceeded the set speed.

Speed Limiter - Set Speed

This feature sets the desired speed limit value. By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), per rotation, from a minimum of 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 110 mph (180 km/h).

Forward Collision Warning If Equipped

This feature sets the type and sensitivity of the assistance features for the anti-collision system. The options available are:

"Mode": used to set the following operating modes: Warning and Brake, Only Warning, or Disabled

"Sensitivity": used to select desired distance of the obstacle (near, medium, or far) that the assistance features activate at.

Settings Menu

229

Lane Departure Warning

This feature is used to select the "readiness" of the Lane Departure system to activate. The option available is:

"Sensitivity": used to select the timing (early, or late) for when the assistance features activate.

Blind Spot Monitoring

Used to activate/deactivate the sound warning that indicates that objects are detected in the blind spot of the exterior rear view mirrors.

Driver Assistance To access Driver assistance settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

ParkSense

This feature is used to select the type of warning provided by the ParkSense system.

The options available are: Mode: the following options are

available in this function: Sound, the system notifies the driver of the presence of an obstacle by means of sound. This sound warning can be heard from the speakers in the car. Sound and Display, the system notifies the driver of the presence of an obstacle by means of sound and visual signals on the instrument panel display.

"Parksense Volume": sets the volume of the sound warnings provided by the ParkSense system, the available options are: "High, "Medium," or "Low".

Rear View Camera If Equipped

This function can be used to carry out the following adjustments:

"View": lets you activate the video camera on the display.

"Camera Delay": allows you to delay the camera from shutting off immediately when the vehicle is taken out of REVERSE.

"Camera Guidelines": allows you to activate the dynamic guidelines that appear on the display to indicate the route of the vehicle.

Automatic Parking Brake

This function allows you to activate/deactivate the automatic parking brake activation, when the engine is turned off.

Brake Service If Equipped

This function activates a vehicle mode that allows brake system servicing.

Doors & Locks To access Doors & Locks settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Door Lock in Motion Unlock All Doors on Exit Passive Entry Door Unlock on Entry Horn with Remote Start Sound Horn with Lock Restore Settings

Cluster To access Cluster settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Warning Buzzer Volume Trip B Phone Repeat Restore Settings

230

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

Infotainment To access Infotainment settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Screen Off Splitscreen Audio Bluetooth Radio Media Phone Navigation (if equipped) Apps

System To access System settings, select it using the Rotary Pad. The following settings can be modified when this mode is selected:

Auto-On Radio Switch-Off Delay Software Update Map Update Clear Personal Data Restore Settings

APPLICATIONS Application Mode can be activated from the main menu (MENU button) by turning and pressing the Rotary Pad.

The following information appears on the display:

"My Car: lets you see a series of information linked to the vehicle status.

Efficient Drive: lets you see some driving style parameters.

Users Manual: lets you view and read the vehicle's user manual.

VOICE COMMANDS Note: Voice commands are not available for languages not supported by the system.

To use the voice commands, press the button on the steering wheel and say one of the commands below for the function you want to activate. The available voice commands are listed below:

Radio Functions The button can be used to activate the following functions:

Tune In Station Xxx

Tune In Frequency Xxx

Add To Favorites

Show Available Stations

Show Favorite Stations

FM

AM

SiriusXM

Application Mode

231

Media Functions The button can be used to activate the following functions:

Display Album

Play Album

Display Artist

Play Artist

Display Composer

Play Composer

Display Genre

Play Genre

Display Playlist

Play Playlist

Play Song

Play All

Display All The Albums

Display All The Artists

Display All The Composers

Display All The Genres

Display All The Playlists

View All Songs

Activate Shuffle

Deactivate Shuffle

Pass To Aux

Pass To USB 1

Pass To USB 2

Pass To Bluetooth

Phone Functions The button can be used to activate the following functions:

Dial

Call

Redial

Show Contacts

Show All Calls

Show Missed Calls

Search

Navigation Functions If Equipped The button can be used to activate the following functions:

Navigate To

Favorite

Set 2D Map

Set Detailed 3D Map

Set Overhead View

Route Preview

Start Navigation

Interrupt Navigation

Repeat Instructions

Show Map

Find The Nearest

232

M U

LT IM

E D

IA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .234 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . .234 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . .236 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .236 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .237

233

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history, as this can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.

If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

234

C U

S TO

M E

R A

S S

IS TA

N C

E

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (home and office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Alfa Romeo Customer Center

P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872)

Alfa Romeo Customer Center (Canada)

P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or

a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the

manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

Warning!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

235

WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.

236

C U

S TO

M E

R A

S S

IS TA

N C

E

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

User Guide These User Guides have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Call toll free at:

1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

www.techauthority.com

237

INDEX Active Aerodynamics . . . . . . . . . . .40 Active Safety Systems . . . . . . . . . .68 Active Torque Vectoring (ATV)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . .125 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

Air Bag Components . . . . . . .88,94 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . .90 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . .88 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .91 Enhanced Accident Response . .162 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .162 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . .94 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . .91 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . .108

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .88,110 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .96 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .14 Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) . . . . .120

Alfa DNA System. . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System. . . .68 Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . .142 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . .27 Automatic Headlights. . . . . . . . . . .28 Automatic Temperature Control

(ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .117 Auxiliary Driving Systems . . . . . . . .71

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Battery Recharging . . . . . . . . . . .175 Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .71 Bluetooth Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Bodywork (Cleaning And

Maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Brake Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . .174 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Camera, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . .109 Changing A Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . .178 Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Checking Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . .109 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . .107 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Infants And Child Restraints . . . .99 LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . .102 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . .101 Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . .190 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Controls On Console . . . . . . . .219 Summary Table . . . . . . . .219,223

Controls On Steering Wheel . . . . . .223 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .125 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . .234

IN D

E X

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . .28 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . .28 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . .110 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Direction Indicators (Changing A

Bulb). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . .142,159 Door Locks

Child-Protection Door Lock Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . .18

Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Drive Train Control (DTC) System . . .69 Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Electric Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . .115 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . .27 Electric Steering Wheel Heating . . . .26 Electronic Speed Control. . . . . . . .122 Electronic Speed Control

(Cruise Control) . . . . . .122,123,125 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Emergency Refuelling. . . . . . . . . .158 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . .155 Emergency, In Case Of . . . . . . . . .152

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .142 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .155,157 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142,159

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Engine Coolant Level . . . . . . . .174 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . .109 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . .208 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . .155,157

Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . .171 Engine Oil

Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Enhanced Accident Response

Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .109 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . .28,29 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .28,111 External Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . .142 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .30,111

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Fluids And Lubricants. . . . . . . . . .211 Forward Collision Warning. . . . . . . .74 Front Light Cluster With Main

Beam Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights (Bulb Replacement) . . .146

Front Mobile Spoiler (Alfa Active Aero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Front Seat Electric Heating . . . . . . .21 Front Seats (Power Adjustment) . . . .20 Front Wipers

Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . .31 Fuel

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . .208

Fuse Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Fuses (Replacement) . . . . . . . . . .147

General Information . . . . . . . . .74,132

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .142 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .23,24 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Headlights

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28,29 High Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . .29

Automatic High Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Hill Start Assist (HSA) System . . . . .70 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Identification Data . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Instrument Cluster Display

Instrument Cluster Display . . . . .44

Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Instrument Panel Features Instrument Panel Features . . . . . .42

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . .155,157

Key Fob Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . .10

Keyless Enter-N-Go Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Lane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . .30 Lane Departure Warning System. . .135 LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Lifting The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Types Of Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88,110

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . .28 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . .28 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . .142 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . .28,29 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .28,29 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .28,29 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . .30,111

Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Luggage/Cargo Capacity . . . . . . . .39

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Mirrors

Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . .27 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . .27 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . .27

OBD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .81 Owner's Manual (Operator

Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Paintwork (Cleaning And Maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System . . .70 Park Sensors System. . . . . . . . . .133 Performance (Top Speed) . . . . . . .213 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Placard, Tire And Loading

Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Power

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Power Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .86 Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity . . . . . .195

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . .11,13,18 Rain Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Rear View Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Refueling Procedure. . . . . . . . . . .138 Refueling The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .138 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . .82

IN D

E X

Replacement Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .189 Replacing A Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Replacing An External Bulb . . . . . .146 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . .236 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Rims And Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . .109 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . .111 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . .236 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . .178 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . .109 SBL Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 Scheduled Servicing . . . . . . . . . .164 Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) . . .168 Scheduled Servicing Program

(2.9 V6 Gasoline Engine Versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Seat Belt Energy Management Feature . . . .87 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . .85 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . .83 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .86 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . .87 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . .82

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82,109

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .82,83 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .86 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . .85

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . .20 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .234 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . .177 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . .30,111 Snow Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190,191 Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .123,125

Speed Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Split folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . .22 Starting The Engine . . . . . . . . . . .114 Steering

Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Stop/Start System. . . . . . . . . . . .121 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Supplemental Restraint System -

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Telescoping Steering Column . . . . .25 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .25 Tire And Loading Information

Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . .178 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .111,186,190,193

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . .188 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . .190 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . .152 General Information . . . . . .186,190 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . .186 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .193 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178,186 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .190,191 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .188

To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . .160 Towing

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .159 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring

System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . .70 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Tread Wear Indicators. . . . . . . . . .188 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . .193 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . .85 Use Of The Owners Manual . . . . . . .3

Vehicle Changes/Alterations . . . . . . .5 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . .198 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . .142 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . .236 Washer Fluid For

Windshield/Headlights. . . . . . . .174 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . .31 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . .191 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . . . . .191 Wheels And Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . .110 Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Replacing Blades . . . . . . . . . .177 Windshield Wiper/Washer

Smart Washing Function . . . . . . .31 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

IN D

E X

If you have any questions about your vehicle or need assistance, please call Alfa Romeo Customer Care at 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada).

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Owners Manual or Warranty Booklet by calling 1 844 253-2872 (U.S.) or 1 800 387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.

The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted

can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC

strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature

that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cell phones,

computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle

is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also

dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable

to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cell phones or texting while driving.

It is always the drivers responsibility to comply with all local laws.

I M P O R T A N T

This User Guide is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your

Owners Manual, Radio Manual and Warranty Booklets can be found by visiting the website on

the back cover of your User Guide. We hope you find it useful. U.S. residents can purchase

replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase

replacement kits by calling 1 800 387-1143.

D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O L Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

W A R N I N G ! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Alfa Romeo and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owners Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owners Manual and Radio Manual found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit alfaromeousa.com or your local Alfa Romeo dealer.

2 0 1 7 U S E R G U I D E

2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. ALFA ROMEO is a registered trademark of FCA Group Marketing S.p.A., used with permission.

Whether its providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicles heritage, knowing what steps to

take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Giulia Alfa Romeo works, you can view and download the Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User Guide for Alfa Romeo Giulia as well as other Alfa Romeo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Alfa Romeo Giulia. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Alfa Romeo Giulia 2017 User Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.